Make use of the frame stash to detect wider stack cycles.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
56dd11f0 3@c Copyright 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
9160ea82
AM
42@ifnottex
43@dircategory Software development
44@direntry
252b5132 45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
46@end direntry
47@end ifnottex
252b5132 48
0e9517a9 49@copying
e49e529d
JM
50This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
51@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
52@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
53@end ifset
54version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 55
56dd11f0 56Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 57
cf055d54 58Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 59under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
60or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
61with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
62Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 63section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 64@end copying
252b5132
RH
65@iftex
66@finalout
67@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 68@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 69@titlepage
71ba23f6 70@title The GNU linker
252b5132 71@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
72@subtitle @code{ld}
73@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
74@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
75@end ifset
252b5132
RH
76@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
77@author Steve Chamberlain
78@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
79@page
80
81@tex
82{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
83\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
84\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 85\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
86\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
87}
88\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
89@end tex
90
91@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 92@c man begin COPYRIGHT
56dd11f0 93Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 94
0285c67d 95Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 96under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
97or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
98with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
99Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 100section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 101@c man end
252b5132 102
252b5132
RH
103@end titlepage
104@end iftex
4ecceb71 105@contents
252b5132
RH
106@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
107
84ec0e6d 108@ifnottex
252b5132 109@node Top
71ba23f6 110@top LD
e49e529d
JM
111This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
112@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
113@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
114@end ifset
115version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 116
cf055d54 117This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
118Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
119in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 120
252b5132
RH
121@menu
122* Overview:: Overview
123* Invocation:: Invocation
124* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
125@ifset GENERIC
126* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
127@end ifset
128@ifclear GENERIC
129@ifset H8300
130* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
131@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
132@ifset Renesas
133* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
134@end ifset
135@ifset I960
136* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
137@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
138@ifset ARM
139* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
141@ifset M68HC11
142* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
147@ifset M68K
148* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149@end ifset
833794fc
MR
150@ifset MIPS
151* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
2509a395 338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349@smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
352
353Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354linker:
355
ff5dcc92 356@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 357@include at-file.texi
dff70155 358
2509a395
SL
359@kindex -a @var{keyword}
360@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
361This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
7ee314fa
AM
367@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
368@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
370@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
371specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
372will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
373finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 374it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 375This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 376interface.
7ee314fa 377
252b5132
RH
378@ifset I960
379@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
380@kindex -A @var{arch}
381@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
382@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
383@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
384In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
385Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
386@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
387the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 388archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
389family}, for details.
390
ff5dcc92 391Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
392other architecture families.
393@end ifset
394
395@ifclear SingleFormat
396@cindex binary input format
397@kindex -b @var{format}
398@kindex --format=@var{format}
399@cindex input format
400@cindex input format
401@item -b @var{input-format}
402@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
403@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
404file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 405@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 406that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 407configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 408to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
409default input format the most usual format on each machine.
410@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
411supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
412formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
413@xref{BFD}.
414
415You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
416binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
417linking object files of different formats), by including
418@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 419particular format.
252b5132
RH
420
421The default format is taken from the environment variable
422@code{GNUTARGET}.
423@ifset UsesEnvVars
424@xref{Environment}.
425@end ifset
426You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
427@code{TARGET};
428@ifclear man
429see @ref{Format Commands}.
430@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
431@end ifclear
432
433@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
434@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@cindex compatibility, MRI
436@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
437@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 438For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 439files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
440@ifclear man
441@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
442@end ifclear
443@ifset man
444the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
445@end ifset
446Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 447the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
448scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
449If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
450specified by any @samp{-L} options.
451
452@cindex common allocation
453@kindex -d
454@kindex -dc
455@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 456@item -d
252b5132
RH
457@itemx -dc
458@itemx -dp
459These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
460compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
461even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
462script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
463@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
464
7ee314fa
AM
465@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
466@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
467@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
470@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
471specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
472will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
473option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 474The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 475
252b5132
RH
476@cindex entry point, from command line
477@kindex -e @var{entry}
478@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 479@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
480@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
481Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
482program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
483named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
484and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
485base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
486@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
487and other ways of specifying the entry point.
488
b58f81ae
DJ
489@kindex --exclude-libs
490@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
491Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 492exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
493@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
494automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
495port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
496explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
497option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
498be treated as hidden.
499
e1c37eb5
DK
500@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
501@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
502Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
503should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
504into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
505may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
506used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
507the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
508match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
509command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
510of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
511regardless of this option.
512
252b5132
RH
513@cindex dynamic symbol table
514@kindex -E
515@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 516@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
517@item -E
518@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
519@itemx --no-export-dynamic
520When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
521option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
522all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
523set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
524
525If you do not use either of these options (or use the
526@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
527dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
528referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
529
530If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
531back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
532dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
533linking the program itself.
534
55255dae 535You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 536be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 537See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 538
8b747e1a
DK
539Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
540support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
541the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
542
36f63dca 543@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
544@cindex big-endian objects
545@cindex endianness
546@kindex -EB
547@item -EB
548Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
549
550@cindex little-endian objects
551@kindex -EL
552@item -EL
553Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 554@end ifclear
252b5132 555
2509a395
SL
556@kindex -f @var{name}
557@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
558@item -f @var{name}
559@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
560When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
561to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
562table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
563symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
564
565If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
566run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
567the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
568first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
569@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
570in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
571Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
572implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
573machine specific performance.
574
575This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
576will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
577
2509a395
SL
578@kindex -F @var{name}
579@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 580@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 581@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
582When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
583the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
584of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
585on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
586
587If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
588run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
589dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
590filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
591found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
592used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
593@var{name}.
594
ff5dcc92 595Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 596toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
597object files.
598@ifclear SingleFormat
599The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 600@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 601@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
602environment variable.
603@end ifclear
604The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
605creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 606
3dbf70a2 607@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
608@kindex -fini=@var{name}
609@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
610When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
611executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
612address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
613the function to call.
614
252b5132
RH
615@kindex -g
616@item -g
617Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
618
2509a395
SL
619@kindex -G @var{value}
620@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 621@cindex object size
2509a395 622@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
623@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
624Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
625@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 626MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
627sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
628
629@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 630@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 631@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 632@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
633@itemx -soname=@var{name}
634When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
635the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
636which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
637linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
638field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
639
640@kindex -i
641@cindex incremental link
642@item -i
643Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
644
3dbf70a2 645@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
646@kindex -init=@var{name}
647@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
648When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
649executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
650of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
651function to call.
652
252b5132 653@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 654@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 655@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 656@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
657@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
658Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
659list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
660If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 661will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 662will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 663
ff5dcc92 664On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
665files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
666and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
667called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
668@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
669indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
670to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
671@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
672
673The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
674specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
675was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
676command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
677archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
678the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
679
ff5dcc92 680See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
681archives multiple times.
682
683You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
684
685@ifset GENERIC
686This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 687if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
688behaviour of the AIX linker.
689@end ifset
690
691@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 692@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 693@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 694@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 695@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
696Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
697for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
698option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
699in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
700on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 701@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
702order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
703how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
704option is specified.
252b5132 705
9c8ebd6a
DJ
706If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
707by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
708
252b5132
RH
709@ifset UsesEnvVars
710The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 711@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
712some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
713@end ifset
714
715The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
716@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
717at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
718
719@cindex emulation
720@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 721@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
722Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
723emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
724
725If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
726@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
727
728Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
729configured.
730
731@cindex link map
732@kindex -M
733@kindex --print-map
734@item -M
735@itemx --print-map
736Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
737information about the link, including the following:
738
739@itemize @bullet
740@item
3b83e13a 741Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
742@item
743How common symbols are allocated.
744@item
745All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
746which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
747@item
748The values assigned to symbols.
749
750Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
751involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
752have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
753linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
754of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
755the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
756linker script containing:
757
758@smallexample
759 foo = 1
760 foo = foo * 4
761 foo = foo + 8
762@end smallexample
763
764will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
765option is used:
766
767@smallexample
768 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
769 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
771@end smallexample
772
773See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
774scripts.
252b5132
RH
775@end itemize
776
777@kindex -n
778@cindex read-only text
779@cindex NMAGIC
780@kindex --nmagic
781@item -n
782@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
783Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
784libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
785mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
786
787@kindex -N
788@kindex --omagic
789@cindex read/write from cmd line
790@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 791@item -N
252b5132
RH
792@itemx --omagic
793Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
794not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
795libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
796mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
797is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
798specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
799
800@kindex --no-omagic
801@cindex OMAGIC
802@item --no-omagic
803This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
804sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
805be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
806shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
807
808@kindex -o @var{output}
809@kindex --output=@var{output}
810@cindex naming the output file
811@item -o @var{output}
812@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 813Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
814option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
815script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
816
817@kindex -O @var{level}
818@cindex generating optimized output
819@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 820If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 821the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
822should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
823option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
824the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
825no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
826of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 827
a712da20
NC
828@kindex -q
829@kindex --emit-relocs
830@cindex retain relocations in final executable
831@item -q
832@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 833Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
834Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
835order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
836in larger executables.
837
dbab7a7b
NC
838This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
839
4f471f39
RS
840@kindex --force-dynamic
841@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
842@item --force-dynamic
843Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
844to VxWorks targets.
845
252b5132
RH
846@cindex partial link
847@cindex relocatable output
848@kindex -r
1049f94e 849@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 850@item -r
1049f94e 851@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 852Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 853turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
854linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
855magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
856@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 857@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
858If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
859linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
860constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
861
62bf86b4
HPN
862When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
863partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
864relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
865example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
866with input files in other formats at all.
867
252b5132
RH
868This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
869
870@kindex -R @var{file}
871@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
872@cindex symbol-only input
873@item -R @var{filename}
874@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
875Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
876relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
877to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
878programs. You may use this option more than once.
879
ff5dcc92 880For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 881followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 882the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
883
884@kindex -s
885@kindex --strip-all
886@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 887@item -s
252b5132
RH
888@itemx --strip-all
889Omit all symbol information from the output file.
890
891@kindex -S
892@kindex --strip-debug
893@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 894@item -S
252b5132
RH
895@itemx --strip-debug
896Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
897
898@kindex -t
899@kindex --trace
900@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 901@item -t
252b5132 902@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 903Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
904
905@kindex -T @var{script}
906@kindex --script=@var{script}
907@cindex script files
908@item -T @var{scriptfile}
909@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
910Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 911@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 912@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
913output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
914the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
915specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
916options accumulate.
252b5132 917
14be8564
L
918@kindex -dT @var{script}
919@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
920@cindex script files
921@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
922@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
923Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
924
925This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
926processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
927command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
928@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
929behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
930command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
931the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
932@samp{gcc}).
933
252b5132
RH
934@kindex -u @var{symbol}
935@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
936@cindex undefined symbol
937@item -u @var{symbol}
938@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
939Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
940symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
941modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
942different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
943option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
944
945@kindex -Ur
946@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 947@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
948For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
949@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 950turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
951@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
952It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
953with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
954be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
955@samp{-r} for the others.
956
577a0623
AM
957@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
958@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
960@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
961missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
962specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
963multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
964input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
965in a linker script.
a854a4a7 966
252b5132
RH
967@kindex -v
968@kindex -V
969@kindex --version
970@cindex version
971@item -v
972@itemx --version
973@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 974Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
975lists the supported emulations.
976
977@kindex -x
978@kindex --discard-all
979@cindex deleting local symbols
980@item -x
981@itemx --discard-all
982Delete all local symbols.
983
984@kindex -X
985@kindex --discard-locals
986@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 987@item -X
252b5132 988@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
989Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
990system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
991or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
992
993@kindex -y @var{symbol}
994@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
995@cindex symbol tracing
996@item -y @var{symbol}
997@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
998Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
999option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1000to prepend an underscore.
1001
1002This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1003don't know where the reference is coming from.
1004
1005@kindex -Y @var{path}
1006@item -Y @var{path}
1007Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1008for Solaris compatibility.
1009
1010@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1011@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1012The recognized keywords are:
1013@table @samp
1014
1015@item combreloc
1016Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1017lookup caching possible.
1018
1019@item defs
560e09e9 1020Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1021shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1022
6aa29e7b
JJ
1023@item execstack
1024Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1025
b039ef04
L
1026@item global
1027This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1028the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1029of subsequently loaded libraries.
1030
cd6d6c15
NC
1031@item initfirst
1032This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1033It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1034before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1035the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1036the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1037objects.
1038
1039@item interpose
1040Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1041but the primary executable.
1042
5fa222e4
AM
1043@item lazy
1044When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1045dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1046the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1047Lazy binding is the default.
1048
cd6d6c15
NC
1049@item loadfltr
1050Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1051runtime.
1052
1053@item muldefs
1054Allows multiple definitions.
1055
1056@item nocombreloc
1057Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1058
1059@item nocopyreloc
1060Disables production of copy relocs.
1061
1062@item nodefaultlib
1063Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1064ignore any default library search paths.
1065
1066@item nodelete
1067Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1068
1069@item nodlopen
1070Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1071
1072@item nodump
1073Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1074
6aa29e7b
JJ
1075@item noexecstack
1076Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1077
1078@item norelro
1079Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1080
cd6d6c15
NC
1081@item now
1082When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1083dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1084when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1085deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1086first called.
1087
1088@item origin
1089Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1090
6aa29e7b
JJ
1091@item relro
1092Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1093
24718e3b
L
1094@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1095Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1096
1097@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1098Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1099
04c3a755
NS
1100@item stack-size=@var{value}
1101Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1102Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1103@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1104
cd6d6c15
NC
1105@end table
1106
ece2d90e 1107Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1108
1109@kindex -(
1110@cindex groups of archives
1111@item -( @var{archives} -)
1112@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1113The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1114either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1115
1116The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1117references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1118the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1119archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1120object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1121would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1122they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1123resolved.
1124
1125Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1126it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1127more archives.
1128
69da35b5
NC
1129@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1130@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1131@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1132@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1133Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1134recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1135and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1136the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1137behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1138so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1139restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1140
4a43e768
AM
1141@kindex --as-needed
1142@kindex --no-as-needed
1143@item --as-needed
1144@itemx --no-as-needed
1145This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1146on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1147the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1148on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1149needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1150emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1151non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1152the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries, a
1153non-weak undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
1154Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1155the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1156needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1157from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1158
e56f61be
L
1159@kindex --add-needed
1160@kindex --no-add-needed
1161@item --add-needed
1162@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1163These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1164their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1165options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1166and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1167
252b5132
RH
1168@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1169@item -assert @var{keyword}
1170This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1171
1172@kindex -Bdynamic
1173@kindex -dy
1174@kindex -call_shared
1175@item -Bdynamic
1176@itemx -dy
1177@itemx -call_shared
1178Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1179for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1180default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1181for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1182multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1183@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1184
a1ab1d2a
UD
1185@kindex -Bgroup
1186@item -Bgroup
1187Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1188section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1189object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1190@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1191only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1192
252b5132
RH
1193@kindex -Bstatic
1194@kindex -dn
1195@kindex -non_shared
1196@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1197@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1198@itemx -dn
1199@itemx -non_shared
1200@itemx -static
1201Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1202platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1203variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1204may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1205library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1206option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1207option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1208shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1209references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1210libraries.
252b5132
RH
1211
1212@kindex -Bsymbolic
1213@item -Bsymbolic
1214When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1215definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1216for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1217within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1218platforms which support shared libraries.
1219
40b36307
L
1220@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1221@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1222When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1223symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1224This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1225libraries.
1226
55255dae
L
1227@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1228@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1229Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1230typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1231global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1232within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1233to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1234in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1235which support shared libraries.
1236
1237The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1238scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1239
40b36307
L
1240@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1241@item --dynamic-list-data
1242Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1243
1244@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1245@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1246Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1247is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1248
0b8a70d9
L
1249@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1250@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1251Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1252
252b5132
RH
1253@kindex --check-sections
1254@kindex --no-check-sections
1255@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1256@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1257Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1258been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1259perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1260suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1261allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1262restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1263Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1264force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1265option.
252b5132 1266
ddbb8a31
NC
1267@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1268@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1269@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1270@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1271This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1272by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1273command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1274output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1275input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1276specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1277follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1278behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1279
1280This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1281libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1282mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1283their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1284required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1285the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1286dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1287symbols.
1288
252b5132
RH
1289@cindex cross reference table
1290@kindex --cref
1291@item --cref
1292Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1293generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1294Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1295
1296The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1297easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1298sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1299symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1300definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1301where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1302symbol are listed.
252b5132 1303
4818e05f
AM
1304@cindex common allocation
1305@kindex --no-define-common
1306@item --no-define-common
1307This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1308The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1309@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1310
1311The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1312the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1313of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1314forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1315Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1316from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1317This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1318and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1319duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1320paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1321
252b5132 1322@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1323@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1324@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1325Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1326address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1327times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1328limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1329context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1330symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1331constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1332using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1333Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1334space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1335@var{expression}.
1336
1337@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1338@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1339@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1340@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1341@itemx --no-demangle
1342These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1343and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1344present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1345underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1346mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1347different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1348to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1349demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1350is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1351
1352@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1353@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1354@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1355@item -I@var{file}
1356@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1357Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1358generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1359linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1360doing.
1361
7ce691ae 1362@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1363@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1364@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1365@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1366Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1367with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1368
252b5132
RH
1369@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1370@item --force-exe-suffix
1371Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1372
1373If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1374@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1375the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1376option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1377Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1378it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1379
1380@kindex --gc-sections
1381@kindex --no-gc-sections
1382@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1383@item --gc-sections
1384@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1385Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1386targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1387performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1388@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1389
d5465ba2
AM
1390@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1391examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1392symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1393command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1394referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1395libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1396referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1397the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1398relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1399
ac69cbc6 1400This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1401@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1402specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1403a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1404
c17d87de
NC
1405@kindex --print-gc-sections
1406@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1407@cindex garbage collection
1408@item --print-gc-sections
1409@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1410List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1411printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1412collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1413default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1414be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1415line.
1416
30824704
RM
1417@kindex --print-output-format
1418@cindex output format
1419@item --print-output-format
1420Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1421other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1422in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1423
252b5132
RH
1424@cindex help
1425@cindex usage
1426@kindex --help
1427@item --help
1428Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1429
ea20a7da
CC
1430@kindex --target-help
1431@item --target-help
1432Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1433
2509a395
SL
1434@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1435@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1436Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1437@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1438
1439@cindex memory usage
1440@kindex --no-keep-memory
1441@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1442@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1443symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1444instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1445necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1446while linking a large executable.
1447
1448@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1449@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1450@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1451@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1452Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1453is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1454The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1455behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1456libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1457
aa713662
L
1458@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1459@kindex -z muldefs
1460@item --allow-multiple-definition
1461@itemx -z muldefs
1462Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1463report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1464first definition will be used.
1465
b79e8c78 1466@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1467@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1468@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1469@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1470Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1471This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1472determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1473shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1474how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1475
903249d7
NC
1476The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1477referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1478an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1479a shared library.
1480
1481The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1482libraries specified at link time are that:
1483
1484@itemize @bullet
1485@item
1486A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1487that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1488resolvable at load time.
1489@item
1490There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1491symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1492
1493The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1494select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1495architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1496appropriate memset function.
1497@end itemize
b79e8c78 1498
31941635
L
1499@kindex --no-undefined-version
1500@item --no-undefined-version
1501Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1502it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1503will be issued instead.
1504
3e3b46e5
PB
1505@kindex --default-symver
1506@item --default-symver
1507Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1508exported symbols.
1509
1510@kindex --default-imported-symver
1511@item --default-imported-symver
1512Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1513imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1514
252b5132
RH
1515@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1516@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1517Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1518files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1519been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1520This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1521errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1522have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1523inappropriate.
1524
fe7929ce
AM
1525@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1526@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1527Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1528library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1529
252b5132
RH
1530@kindex --no-whole-archive
1531@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1532Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1533archive files.
1534
1535@cindex output file after errors
1536@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1537@item --noinhibit-exec
1538Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1539Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1540errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1541when it issues any error whatsoever.
1542
0a9c1c8e
CD
1543@kindex -nostdlib
1544@item -nostdlib
1545Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1546command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1547(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1548
252b5132 1549@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1550@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1551@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1552@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1553file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1554@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1555object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1556object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1557should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1558usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1559name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1560list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1561command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1562this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1563@end ifclear
1564
36af4a4e
JJ
1565@kindex -pie
1566@kindex --pic-executable
1567@item -pie
1568@itemx --pic-executable
1569@cindex position independent executables
1570Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1571ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1572libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1573address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1574normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1575defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1576
252b5132
RH
1577@kindex -qmagic
1578@item -qmagic
1579This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1580
1581@kindex -Qy
1582@item -Qy
1583This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1584
1585@kindex --relax
1586@cindex synthesizing linker
1587@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1588@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1589@item --relax
28d5f677 1590@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1591An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1592@ifset GENERIC
1593This option is only supported on a few targets.
1594@end ifset
1595@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1596@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1597@end ifset
1598@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1599@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1600@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1601@ifset XTENSA
1602@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1603@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1604@ifset M68HC11
1605@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1606@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1607@ifset POWERPC
1608@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1609@end ifset
252b5132 1610
28d5f677
NC
1611On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1612global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1613addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1614synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1615instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1616
1617On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1618debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1619@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1620This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1621family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1622@end ifset
1623
1624@ifset GENERIC
1625On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1626but ignored.
1627@end ifset
1628
28d5f677
NC
1629On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1630@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1631
252b5132
RH
1632@cindex retaining specified symbols
1633@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1634@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1635@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1636@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1637Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1638discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1639symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1640@ifset GENERIC
1641(such as VxWorks)
1642@end ifset
1643where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1644run-time memory.
1645
1646@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1647or symbols needed for relocations.
1648
1649You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1650line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1651
1652@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1653@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1654@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1655@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1656Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1657linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1658arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1659them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1660also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1661objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1662@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1663ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1664@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1665
ff5dcc92 1666The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1667SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1668@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1669runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1670options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1671gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1672file systems.
252b5132 1673
ff5dcc92 1674For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1675followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1676the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1677@end ifset
1678
1679@ifset GENERIC
1680@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1681@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1682@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1683When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1684happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1685of the input files.
1686
1687When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1688non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1689shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1690explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1691specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1692@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1693either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1694appearing multiple times.
1695
28c309a2
NC
1696This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1697that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1698is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1699runtime linker would do.
1700
252b5132 1701The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1702libraries:
252b5132
RH
1703@enumerate
1704@item
ff5dcc92 1705Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1706@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1707Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1708between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1709specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1710used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1711at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1712by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1713the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1714@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1715On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1716@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1717environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1718@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1719On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1720directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1721@item
a1b8d843 1722For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1723variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1724@item
ec4eb78a
L
1725For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1726@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1727libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1728@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1729@item
252b5132
RH
1730The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1731@item
1732For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1733exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1734@end enumerate
1735
1736If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1737warning and continue with the link.
1738@end ifset
1739
1740@kindex -shared
1741@kindex -Bshareable
1742@item -shared
1743@itemx -Bshareable
1744@cindex shared libraries
1745Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1746and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1747shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1748undefined symbols in the link.
1749
252b5132 1750@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1751@item --sort-common
1752@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1753@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1754This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1755ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1756sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1757eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1758between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1759specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1760
2509a395
SL
1761@kindex --sort-section=name
1762@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1763This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1764patterns in the linker script.
1765
2509a395
SL
1766@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1767@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1768This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1769patterns in the linker script.
1770
252b5132 1771@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1772@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1773Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1774each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1775size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1776
1777@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1778@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1779Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1780output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1781This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1782certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1783cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1784that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1785support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1786input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1787more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1788many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1789
1790@kindex --stats
1791@item --stats
1792Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1793as execution time and memory usage.
1794
2509a395 1795@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1796@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1797Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1798configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1799that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1800
252b5132
RH
1801@kindex --traditional-format
1802@cindex traditional format
1803@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1804For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1805the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1806use the traditional format instead.
1807
1808@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1809For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1810symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1811full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1812@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1813trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1814combine duplicate entries.
1815
2509a395
SL
1816@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1817@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1818Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1819address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1820times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1821line.
1822@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1823for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1824@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1825should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1826sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1827
2509a395
SL
1828@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1829@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1830@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1831@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1832@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1833@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1834@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1835Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1836@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1837
2509a395
SL
1838@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1839@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1840@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1841When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1842of the first byte of the text segment.
1843
9d5777a3
RM
1844@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1845@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1846@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1847When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1848the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1849text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1850
0d705e9f
AM
1851@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1852@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1853@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1854When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1855model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1856
560e09e9
NC
1857@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1858@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1859Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1860values for @samp{method}:
1861
1862@table @samp
1863@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1864Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1865
1866@item report-all
da8bce14 1867Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1868
1869@item ignore-in-object-files
1870Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1871ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1872
1873@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1874Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1875ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1876when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1877libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1878command line.
1879@end table
1880
1881The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1882by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1883
1884Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1885unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1886can change this to a warning.
1887
1715a13c
L
1888@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1889@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1890@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1891@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1892Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1893supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1894the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1895argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1896
1897@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1898@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1899@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1900Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1901used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1902about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1903is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1904see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1905use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1906symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1907@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1908
7ce691ae 1909@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1910@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1911@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1912@item --warn-common
1913Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1914a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1915but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1916you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1917Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1918warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1919
1920There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1921
1922@table @samp
1923@item int i = 1;
1924A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1925file.
1926
1927@item extern int i;
1928An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1929There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1930variable somewhere.
1931
1932@item int i;
1933A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1934variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1935The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1936single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1937size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1938a definition of the same variable.
1939@end table
1940
1941The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1942Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1943just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1944encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1945a common symbol.
1946
1947@enumerate
1948@item
1949Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1950definition for the symbol.
1951@smallexample
1952@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1953 overridden by definition
1954@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1955@end smallexample
1956
1957@item
1958Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1959the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1960except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1961@smallexample
1962@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1963 overriding common
1964@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1965@end smallexample
1966
1967@item
1968Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1969@smallexample
1970@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1971 of `@var{symbol}'
1972@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1973@end smallexample
1974
1975@item
1976Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1977@smallexample
1978@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1979 overridden by larger common
1980@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1981@end smallexample
1982
1983@item
1984Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1985the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1986encountered in a different order.
1987@smallexample
1988@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1989 overriding smaller common
1990@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1991@end smallexample
1992@end enumerate
1993
1994@kindex --warn-constructors
1995@item --warn-constructors
1996Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1997object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1998detect the use of global constructors.
1999
2000@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2001@item --warn-multiple-gp
2002Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2003This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2004Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2005section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2006of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2007base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2008base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2009bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2010large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2011values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2012option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2013
2014@kindex --warn-once
2015@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2016@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2017@item --warn-once
2018Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2019which refers to it.
2020
2021@kindex --warn-section-align
2022@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2023@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2024@item --warn-section-align
2025Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2026alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2027The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2028is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2029the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2030
8fdd7217
NC
2031@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2032@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2033Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2034
a0c402a5
L
2035@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2036@item --warn-alternate-em
2037Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2038
560e09e9
NC
2039@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2040@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2041If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2042@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2043This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2044
2045@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2046@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2047This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2048it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2049
252b5132
RH
2050@kindex --whole-archive
2051@cindex including an entire archive
2052@item --whole-archive
2053For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2054@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2055in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2056files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2057library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2058library. This option may be used more than once.
2059
7ec229ce 2060Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2061about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2062Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2063list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2064your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2065
2509a395
SL
2066@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2067@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2068Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2069@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2070undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2071@var{symbol}.
2072
2073This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2074wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2075wishes to call the system function, it should call
2076@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2077
2078Here is a trivial example:
2079
2080@smallexample
2081void *
cc2f008e 2082__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2083@{
cc2f008e 2084 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2085 return __real_malloc (c);
2086@}
2087@end smallexample
2088
ff5dcc92 2089If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2090all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2091instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2092call the real @code{malloc} function.
2093
2094You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2095links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2096you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2097file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2098call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2099
6aa29e7b
JJ
2100@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2101@item --eh-frame-hdr
2102Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2103@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2104
e41b3a13
JJ
2105@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2106@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2107Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2108generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2109if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2110
6c1439be
L
2111@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2112@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2113@item --enable-new-dtags
2114@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2115This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2116systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2117@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2118and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2119If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2120created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2121those options are only available for ELF systems.
2122
2d643429 2123@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2124@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2125Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2126close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2127time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2128increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2129value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2130
fdc90cb4
JJ
2131@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2132@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2133Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2134@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2135new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2136the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2137hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2138
35835446
JR
2139@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2140@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2141This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2142linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2143for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2144about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2145
4f9c04f7 2146Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21471021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2148run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2149has been used.
2150
2151The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2152enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2153
c0065db7
RM
2154@kindex --build-id
2155@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2156@item --build-id
2157@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2158Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2159The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2160file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2161@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2162parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2163@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2164@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2165an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2166characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2167omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2168
2169The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2170that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2171unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2172to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2173file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2174string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2175
2176Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2177@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2178@end table
2179
0285c67d
NC
2180@c man end
2181
36f63dca 2182@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2183
0285c67d
NC
2184@c man begin OPTIONS
2185
ff5dcc92 2186The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2187the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2188normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2189use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2190@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2191like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2192symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2193object file).
2194
2195In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2196support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2197PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2198values by either a space or an equals sign.
2199
ff5dcc92 2200@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2201
2202@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2203@item --add-stdcall-alias
2204If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2205as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2206[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2207
2208@kindex --base-file
2209@item --base-file @var{file}
2210Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2211addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2212@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2213[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2214
2215@kindex --dll
2216@item --dll
2217Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2218@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2219file.
bb10df36 2220[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2221
88183869
DK
2222@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2223@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2224@item --enable-long-section-names
2225@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2226The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2227the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2228for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2229fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2230to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2231allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2232disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2233generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2234as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2235with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2236GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2237information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2238option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2239section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2240when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2241image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2242[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2243
252b5132
RH
2244@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2245@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2246@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2247@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2248If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2249do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2250only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2251resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2252undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2253@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2254to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2255warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2256import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2257to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2258feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2259@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2260mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2261[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2262
522f09cd
KT
2263@kindex --leading-underscore
2264@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2265@item --leading-underscore
2266@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2267For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2268in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2269disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2270
252b5132
RH
2271@cindex DLLs, creating
2272@kindex --export-all-symbols
2273@item --export-all-symbols
2274If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2275be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2276otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2277explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2278attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2279option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2280@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2281@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2282exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2283re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2284such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2285@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2286@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2287Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2288not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2289extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2290(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2291These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2292@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2293@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2294@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2295@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2296[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2297
2298@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2299@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2300Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2301exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2302[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2303
2927aaca
NC
2304@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2305@item --exclude-all-symbols
2306Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2307[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2308
252b5132
RH
2309@kindex --file-alignment
2310@item --file-alignment
2311Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2312file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2313512.
bb10df36 2314[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2315
2316@cindex heap size
2317@kindex --heap
2318@item --heap @var{reserve}
2319@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2320Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2321to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2322committed.
bb10df36 2323[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2324
2325@cindex image base
2326@kindex --image-base
2327@item --image-base @var{value}
2328Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2329the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2330is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2331your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2332other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2333for dlls.
bb10df36 2334[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2335
2336@kindex --kill-at
2337@item --kill-at
2338If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2339symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2340[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2341
26d2d8a2
BF
2342@kindex --large-address-aware
2343@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2344If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2345header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2346greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2347or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2348section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2349[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2350
f69a2f97
NC
2351@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2352@item --disable-large-address-aware
2353Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2354This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2355driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2356addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2357[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2358
252b5132
RH
2359@kindex --major-image-version
2360@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2361Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2362[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2363
2364@kindex --major-os-version
2365@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2366Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2367[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2368
2369@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2370@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2371Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2372[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2373
2374@kindex --minor-image-version
2375@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2376Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2377[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2378
2379@kindex --minor-os-version
2380@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2381Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2382[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2383
2384@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2385@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2386Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2387[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2388
2389@cindex DEF files, creating
2390@cindex DLLs, creating
2391@kindex --output-def
2392@item --output-def @var{file}
2393The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2394file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2395(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2396library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2397automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2398[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2399
b044cda1
CW
2400@cindex DLLs, creating
2401@kindex --out-implib
2402@item --out-implib @var{file}
2403The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2404import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2405import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2406may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2407makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2408creation step.
bb10df36 2409[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2410
2411@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2412@item --enable-auto-image-base
2413Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2414using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2415from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2416collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2417avoided.
bb10df36 2418[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2419
2420@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2421@item --disable-auto-image-base
2422Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2423user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2424default.
bb10df36 2425[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2426
2427@cindex DLLs, linking to
2428@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2429@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2430When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2431search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2432@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2433between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2434uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2435@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2436[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2437
2438@kindex --enable-auto-import
2439@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2440Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2441DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2442building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2443'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2444to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2445specification published by Microsoft.
2446
e2a83dd0
NC
2447Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2448data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2449placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2450around a problem with consts that is described here:
2451http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2452
4d8907ac
DS
2453Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2454see this message:
0d888aac 2455
ece2d90e 2456"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2457documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2458
ece2d90e
NC
2459This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2460ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2461allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2462fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2463constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2464multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2465this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2466of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2467the warning, and exit.
2468
2469There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2470data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2471
2fa9fc65
NC
2472One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2473of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2474this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2475
c0065db7
RM
2476A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2477that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2478there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2479a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2480
2481@example
2482extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2483extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2484 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2485@end example
2486
2487or
2488
2489@example
2490extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2491extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2492 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2493@end example
2494
c0065db7 2495For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2496is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2497
2498@example
2499extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2500extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2501 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2502@end example
2503
c406afaf
NC
2504or
2505
2506@example
2507extern long long extern_ll;
2508extern_ll -->
2509 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2510@end example
2511
2fa9fc65 2512A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2513'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2514@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2515requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2516building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2517merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2518between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2519constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2520
2521Original:
2522@example
2523--foo.h
2524extern int arr[];
2525--foo.c
2526#include "foo.h"
2527void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2528 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2529@}
2530@end example
2531
2532Solution 1:
2533@example
2534--foo.h
2535extern int arr[];
2536--foo.c
2537#include "foo.h"
2538void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2539 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2540 volatile int *parr = arr;
2541 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2542@}
2543@end example
2544
2545Solution 2:
2546@example
2547--foo.h
2548/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2549#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2550 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2551#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2552#else
2553#define FOO_IMPORT
2554#endif
2555extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2556--foo.c
2557#include "foo.h"
2558void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2559 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2560@}
2561@end example
2562
c0065db7 2563A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2564library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2565for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2566functions).
bb10df36 2567[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2568
2569@kindex --disable-auto-import
2570@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2571Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2572@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2573[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2574
2fa9fc65
NC
2575@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2576@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2577If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2578that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2579a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2580environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2581[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2582
2583@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2584@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2585Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2586DLLs.
bb10df36 2587[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2588
b044cda1
CW
2589@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2590@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2591Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2592[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2593
252b5132
RH
2594@kindex --section-alignment
2595@item --section-alignment
2596Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2597addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2598[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2599
2600@cindex stack size
2601@kindex --stack
2602@item --stack @var{reserve}
2603@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2604Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2605to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2606committed.
bb10df36 2607[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2608
2609@kindex --subsystem
2610@item --subsystem @var{which}
2611@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2612@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2613Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2614legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2615@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2616the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2617@var{which}.
bb10df36 2618[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2619
2f563b51
DK
2620The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2621of the PE file header:
2622[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2623
2624@kindex --dynamicbase
2625@item --dynamicbase
2626The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2627randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2628Vista for i386 PE targets.
2629
2630@kindex --forceinteg
2631@item --forceinteg
2632Code integrity checks are enforced.
2633
2634@kindex --nxcompat
2635@item --nxcompat
2636The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2637This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2638
2639@kindex --no-isolation
2640@item --no-isolation
2641Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2642
2643@kindex --no-seh
2644@item --no-seh
2645The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2646this image.
2647
2648@kindex --no-bind
2649@item --no-bind
2650Do not bind this image.
2651
2652@kindex --wdmdriver
2653@item --wdmdriver
2654The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2655
2f563b51
DK
2656@kindex --tsaware
2657@item --tsaware
2658The image is Terminal Server aware.
2659
252b5132
RH
2660@end table
2661
0285c67d
NC
2662@c man end
2663
ac145307
BS
2664@ifset C6X
2665@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2666
2667@c man begin OPTIONS
2668
2669The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2670libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2671all executables use an index of 0.
2672
2673@table @gcctabopt
2674
2675@kindex --dsbt-size
2676@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2677This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2678or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2679entries.
2680
2681@kindex --dsbt-index
2682@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2683This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2684to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2685executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2686@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2687
fbd9ad90
PB
2688@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2689The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2690exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2691
ac145307
BS
2692@end table
2693
2694@c man end
2695@end ifset
2696
93fd0973
SC
2697@ifset M68HC11
2698@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2699
2700@c man begin OPTIONS
2701
2702The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2703memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2704
2705@table @gcctabopt
2706
2707@kindex --no-trampoline
2708@item --no-trampoline
2709This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2710is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2711instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2712
2713@kindex --bank-window
2714@item --bank-window @var{name}
2715This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2716the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2717The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2718paging and addresses within the memory window.
2719
2720@end table
2721
2722@c man end
2723@end ifset
2724
7fb9f789
NC
2725@ifset M68K
2726@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2727
2728@c man begin OPTIONS
2729
2730The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2731when linking for 68K targets.
2732
2733@table @gcctabopt
2734
2735@kindex --got
2736@item --got=@var{type}
2737This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2738@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2739@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2740Info entry for @file{ld}.
2741
2742@end table
2743
2744@c man end
2745@end ifset
2746
833794fc
MR
2747@ifset MIPS
2748@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2749
2750@c man begin OPTIONS
2751
2752The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2753generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2754
2755@table @gcctabopt
2756
2757@kindex --insn32
2758@item --insn32
2759@kindex --no-insn32
2760@itemx --no-insn32
2761These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2762generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2763or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
276432-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2765used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2766possible.
2767
2768@end table
2769
2770@c man end
2771@end ifset
2772
252b5132
RH
2773@ifset UsesEnvVars
2774@node Environment
2775@section Environment Variables
2776
0285c67d
NC
2777@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2778
560e09e9 2779You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2780@ifclear SingleFormat
2781@code{GNUTARGET},
2782@end ifclear
2783@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2784
36f63dca 2785@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2786@kindex GNUTARGET
2787@cindex default input format
2788@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2789use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2790of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2791@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2792of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2793attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2794this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2795there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2796object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2797BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2798in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2799@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2800
2801@kindex LDEMULATION
2802@cindex default emulation
2803@cindex emulation, default
2804@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2805@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2806behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2807available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2808the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2809variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2810linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2811
2812@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2813@cindex demangling, default
2814Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2815@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2816default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2817a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2818may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2819options.
2820
0285c67d
NC
2821@c man end
2822@end ifset
2823
252b5132
RH
2824@node Scripts
2825@chapter Linker Scripts
2826
2827@cindex scripts
2828@cindex linker scripts
2829@cindex command files
2830Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2831written in the linker command language.
2832
2833The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2834the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2835the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2836more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2837direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2838described below.
2839
2840The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2841yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2842linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2843to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2844such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2845
2846You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2847line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2848default linker script.
2849
2850You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2851to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2852Linker Scripts}.
2853
2854@menu
2855* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2856* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2857* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2858* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2859* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2860* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2861* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2862* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2863* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2864* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2865* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2866@end menu
2867
2868@node Basic Script Concepts
2869@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2870@cindex linker script concepts
2871We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2872describe the linker script language.
2873
2874The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2875file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2876@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2877The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2878purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2879among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2880section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2881in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2882
2883Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2884also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 2885contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
2886the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2887A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2888area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2889loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2890which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2891of debugging information.
2892
2893Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2894first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2895the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2896@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2897section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2898same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2899is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2900(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2901based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2902RAM address would be the VMA.
2903
2904You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2905program with the @samp{-h} option.
2906
2907Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2908@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2909has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2910information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2911will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2912static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2913referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2914
2915You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2916program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2917option.
2918
2919@node Script Format
2920@section Linker Script Format
2921@cindex linker script format
2922Linker scripts are text files.
2923
2924You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2925either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2926symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2927generally ignored.
2928
2929Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2930If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2931otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2932double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2933file name.
2934
2935You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2936@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2937to whitespace.
2938
2939@node Simple Example
2940@section Simple Linker Script Example
2941@cindex linker script example
2942@cindex example of linker script
2943Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2944
2945The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2946@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2947memory layout of the output file.
2948
2949The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2950describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2951code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2952@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2953Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2954your input files.
2955
2956For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
29570x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2958linker script which will do that:
2959@smallexample
2960SECTIONS
2961@{
2962 . = 0x10000;
2963 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2964 . = 0x8000000;
2965 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2966 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2967@}
2968@end smallexample
2969
2970You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2971followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2972descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2973
252b5132
RH
2974The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2975sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2976counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2977other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2978current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2979incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2980@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2981
2982The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2983required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2984after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2985which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2986wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2987means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2988
2989Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2990@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2991@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2992
2993The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2994the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2995at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2996output section, the value of the location counter will be
2997@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2998effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2999immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3000
3001The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3002alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3003example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3004sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3005may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3006sections.
3007
3008That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3009
3010@node Simple Commands
3011@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3012@cindex linker script simple commands
3013In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3014
3015@menu
3016* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3017* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3018@ifclear SingleFormat
3019* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3020@end ifclear
3021
4a93e180 3022* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3023* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3024@end menu
3025
3026@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3027@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3028@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3029@cindex start of execution
3030@cindex first instruction
3031@cindex entry point
3032The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3033point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3034entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3035@smallexample
3036ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3037@end smallexample
3038
3039There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3040entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3041stopping when one of them succeeds:
3042@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3043@item
252b5132 3044the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3045@item
252b5132 3046the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3047@item
3ab904c4
NC
3048the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3049targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3050check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3051@item
252b5132 3052the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3053@item
252b5132
RH
3054The address @code{0}.
3055@end itemize
3056
3057@node File Commands
36f63dca 3058@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3059@cindex linker script file commands
3060Several linker script commands deal with files.
3061
3062@table @code
3063@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3064@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3065@cindex including a linker script
3066Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3067be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3068with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
306910 levels deep.
3070
4006703d
NS
3071You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3072@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3073
252b5132
RH
3074@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3075@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3076@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3077@cindex input files in linker scripts
3078@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3079@cindex linker script input object files
3080The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3081in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3082
3083For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3084a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3085then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3086
3087In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3088script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3089
e3f2db7f
AO
3090In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3091with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3092located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3093for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3094open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3095linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3096description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3097
ff5dcc92 3098If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3099name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3100@samp{-l}.
3101
3102When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3103files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3104script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3105
3106@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3107@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3108@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3109@cindex grouping input files
3110The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3111files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3112new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3113in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3114
b717d30e
JJ
3115@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3116@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3117@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3118This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3119commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3120as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3121with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3122when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3123@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3124and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3125setting afterwards.
3126
252b5132
RH
3127@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3128@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3129@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3130The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3131@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3132@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3133Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3134precedence.
3135
3136You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3137output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3138
3139@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3140@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3141@cindex library search path in linker script
3142@cindex archive search path in linker script
3143@cindex search path in linker script
3144The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3145@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3146@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3147on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3148are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3149the command line option are searched first.
3150
3151@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3152@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3153@cindex first input file
3154The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3155that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3156though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3157when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3158first file.
3159@end table
3160
3161@ifclear SingleFormat
3162@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3163@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3164A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3165
3166@table @code
3167@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3168@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3169@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3170@cindex output file format in linker script
3171The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3172output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3173exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3174(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3175line option takes precedence.
3176
3177You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3178formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3179This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3180desired endianness.
3181
3182If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3183will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3184output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3185used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3186
3187For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3188command:
3189@smallexample
3190OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3191@end smallexample
3192This says that the default format for the output file is
3193@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3194option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3195format.
3196
3197@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3198@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3199@cindex input file format in linker script
3200The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3201files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3202This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3203(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3204is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3205command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3206@end table
3207@end ifclear
3208
4a93e180
NC
3209@node REGION_ALIAS
3210@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3211@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3212@cindex region alias
3213@cindex region names
3214
3215Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3216@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3217
3218@smallexample
3219REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3220@end smallexample
3221
3222The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3223memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3224to memory regions. An example follows.
3225
3226Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3227memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3228that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3229non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3230access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3231read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3232sections:
3233
3234@itemize @bullet
3235@item
3236@code{.text} program code;
3237@item
3238@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3239@item
3240@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3241@item
3242@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3243@end itemize
3244
3245The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3246part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3247output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3248systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3249@code{C}:
3250@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3251@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3252@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3253@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3254@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3255@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3256@end multitable
3257The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3258loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3259the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3260the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3261
3262The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3263includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3264memory layout:
3265@smallexample
3266INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3267
3268SECTIONS
3269 @{
3270 .text :
3271 @{
3272 *(.text)
3273 @} > REGION_TEXT
3274 .rodata :
3275 @{
3276 *(.rodata)
3277 rodata_end = .;
3278 @} > REGION_RODATA
3279 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3280 @{
3281 data_start = .;
3282 *(.data)
3283 @} > REGION_DATA
3284 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3285 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3286 .bss :
3287 @{
3288 *(.bss)
3289 @} > REGION_BSS
3290 @}
3291@end smallexample
3292
3293Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3294regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3295variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3296@table @code
3297@item A
3298Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3299@smallexample
3300MEMORY
3301 @{
3302 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3303 @}
3304
3305REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3306REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3307REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3308REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3309@end smallexample
3310@item B
3311Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3312into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3313@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3314@smallexample
3315MEMORY
3316 @{
3317 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3318 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3319 @}
3320
3321REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3322REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3323REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3324REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3325@end smallexample
3326@item C
3327Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3328@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3329initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3330system start into the @code{RAM}.
3331@smallexample
3332MEMORY
3333 @{
3334 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3335 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3336 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3337 @}
3338
3339REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3340REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3341REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3342REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3343@end smallexample
3344@end table
3345
3346It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3347@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3348necessary:
3349@smallexample
3350#include <string.h>
3351
3352extern char data_start [];
3353extern char data_size [];
3354extern char data_load_start [];
3355
3356void copy_data(void)
3357@{
3358 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3359 @{
3360 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3361 @}
3362@}
3363@end smallexample
3364
252b5132 3365@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3366@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3367There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3368
3369@table @code
3370@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3371@kindex ASSERT
3372@cindex assertion in linker script
3373Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3374with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3375
3376@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3377@kindex EXTERN
3378@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3379Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3380symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3381modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3382each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3383command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3384
3385@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3386@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3387@cindex common allocation in linker script
3388This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3389to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3390output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3391
4818e05f
AM
3392@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3393@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3394@cindex common allocation in linker script
3395This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3396command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3397to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3398
53d25da6
AM
3399@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3400@kindex INSERT
3401@cindex insert user script into default script
3402This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3403augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3404inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3405@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3406default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3407sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3408linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3409insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3410linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3411default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3412of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3413to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3414is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3415
3416@smallexample
3417SECTIONS
3418@{
3419 OVERLAY :
3420 @{
3421 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3422 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3423 @}
3424@}
3425INSERT AFTER .text;
3426@end smallexample
3427
252b5132
RH
3428@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3429@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3430@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3431This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3432references among certain output sections.
3433
3434In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3435using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3436will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3437errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3438a function defined in the other section.
3439
3440The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3441@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3442an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3443@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3444names.
3445
3446@ifclear SingleFormat
3447@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3448@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3449@cindex machine architecture
3450@cindex architecture
3451Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3452of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3453architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3454the @samp{-f} option.
3455@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3456
3457@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3458@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3459This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3460@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3461in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3462@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3463@end table
3464
3465@node Assignments
3466@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3467@cindex assignment in scripts
3468@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3469@cindex variables, defining
3470You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3471the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3472
3473@menu
3474* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3475* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3476* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3477* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3478* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3479@end menu
3480
3481@node Simple Assignments
3482@subsection Simple Assignments
3483
3484You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3485
3486@table @code
3487@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3488@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3489@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3490@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3491@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3492@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3493@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3494@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3495@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3496@end table
3497
3498The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3499@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3500defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3501
3502The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3503may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3504
3505The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3506
3507Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3508
3509You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3510statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3511section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3512
3513The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3514expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3515
3516Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3517assignments may be used:
3518
3519@smallexample
3520floating_point = 0;
3521SECTIONS
3522@{
3523 .text :
3524 @{
3525 *(.text)
3526 _etext = .;
3527 @}
156e34dd 3528 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3529 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3530@}
3531@end smallexample
3532@noindent
3533In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3534zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3535the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3536defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3537upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3538
eb8476a6
MR
3539@node HIDDEN
3540@subsection HIDDEN
3541@cindex HIDDEN
3542For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3543exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3544
3545Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3546@code{HIDDEN}:
3547
3548@smallexample
3549HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3550SECTIONS
3551@{
3552 .text :
3553 @{
3554 *(.text)
3555 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3556 @}
3557 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3558 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3559@}
3560@end smallexample
3561@noindent
3562In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3563
252b5132
RH
3564@node PROVIDE
3565@subsection PROVIDE
3566@cindex PROVIDE
3567In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3568only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3569the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3570@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3571@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3572@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3573@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3574@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3575
3576Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3577@smallexample
3578SECTIONS
3579@{
3580 .text :
3581 @{
3582 *(.text)
3583 _etext = .;
3584 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3585 @}
3586@}
3587@end smallexample
3588
3589In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3590underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3591the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3592underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3593If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3594linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3595
7af8e998
L
3596@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3597@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3598@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3599Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3600hidden and won't be exported.
3601
73ae6183
NC
3602@node Source Code Reference
3603@subsection Source Code Reference
3604
3605Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3606intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3607a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3608symbol that does not have a value.
3609
3610Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3611transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3612stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3613prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3614mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3615of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3616variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3617linker script variable might be referred to as:
3618
3619@smallexample
3620 extern int foo;
3621@end smallexample
3622
3623But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3624
3625@smallexample
3626 _foo = 1000;
3627@end smallexample
3628
3629In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3630transformation has taken place.
3631
3632When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3633things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3634in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3635second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3636table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3637contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3638value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3639
3640@smallexample
3641 int foo = 1000;
3642@end smallexample
3643
10bf6894 3644creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3645holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3646number 1000 is initially stored.
3647
3648When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3649first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3650memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3651So:
3652
3653@smallexample
3654 foo = 1;
3655@end smallexample
3656
3657looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3658associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3659address. Whereas:
3660
3661@smallexample
3662 int * a = & foo;
3663@end smallexample
3664
10bf6894 3665looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3666and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3667the variable @samp{a}.
3668
3669Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3670the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3671an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3672
3673@smallexample
3674 foo = 1000;
3675@end smallexample
3676
3677creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3678the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3679address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3680linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3681access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3682
3683Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3684you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3685use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3686section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3687linker script contains these declarations:
3688
3689@smallexample
3690@group
3691 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3692 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3693 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3694@end group
3695@end smallexample
3696
3697Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3698
3699@smallexample
3700@group
3701 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3702
73ae6183
NC
3703 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3704@end group
3705@end smallexample
3706
3707Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3708
252b5132 3709@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3710@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3711@kindex SECTIONS
3712The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3713into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3714
3715The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3716@smallexample
3717SECTIONS
3718@{
3719 @var{sections-command}
3720 @var{sections-command}
3721 @dots{}
3722@}
3723@end smallexample
3724
3725Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3726
3727@itemize @bullet
3728@item
3729an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3730@item
3731a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3732@item
3733an output section description
3734@item
3735an overlay description
3736@end itemize
3737
3738The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3739@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3740those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3741understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3742the layout of the output file.
3743
3744Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3745below.
3746
3747If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3748linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3749section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3750input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3751example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3752in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3753
3754@menu
3755* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3756* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3757* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3758* Input Section:: Input section description
3759* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3760* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3761* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3762* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3763* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3764@end menu
3765
3766@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3767@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3768The full description of an output section looks like this:
3769@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3770@group
7e7d5768 3771@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3772 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3773 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3774 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3775 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3776 @{
3777 @var{output-section-command}
3778 @var{output-section-command}
3779 @dots{}
562d3460 3780 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3781@end group
3782@end smallexample
3783
3784Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3785
3786The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3787name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3788The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3789
3790Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3791
3792@itemize @bullet
3793@item
3794a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3795@item
3796an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3797@item
3798data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3799@item
3800a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3801@end itemize
3802
3803@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3804@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3805@cindex name, section
3806@cindex section name
3807The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3808meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3809support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3810must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3811example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3812output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3813names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3814quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3815characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3816commas must be quoted.
3817
3818The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3819Discarding}.
3820
3821@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3822@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3823@cindex address, section
3824@cindex section address
3825The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3826address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3827is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3828
3829If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3830section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3831to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3832alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3833contained within the output section.
3834
3835The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3836
3837@itemize @bullet
3838@item
3839If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3840is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3841in that region.
3842
3843@item
3844If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3845regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3846section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3847be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3848
3849@item
3850If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3851the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3852counter.
3853@end itemize
3854
3855@noindent
3856For example:
3857
252b5132
RH
3858@smallexample
3859.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3860@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3861
252b5132
RH
3862@noindent
3863and
ea5cae92 3864
252b5132
RH
3865@smallexample
3866.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3867@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3868
252b5132
RH
3869@noindent
3870are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3871@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3872counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3873counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3874input sections.
252b5132
RH
3875
3876The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3877For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3878so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3879do something like this:
3880@smallexample
3881.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3882@end smallexample
3883@noindent
3884This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3885aligned upward to the specified value.
3886
3887Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3888location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3889sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3890
3891@node Input Section
36f63dca 3892@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3893@cindex input sections
3894@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3895The most common output section command is an input section description.
3896
3897The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3898You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3899in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3900map the input files into your memory layout.
3901
3902@menu
3903* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3904* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3905* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3906* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3907* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3908@end menu
3909
3910@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3911@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3912@cindex input section basics
3913An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3914by a list of section names in parentheses.
3915
3916The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3917describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3918
3919The most common input section description is to include all input
3920sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3921include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3922@smallexample
3923*(.text)
3924@end smallexample
3925@noindent
18625d54
CM
3926Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3927of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3928match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3929example:
252b5132 3930@smallexample
b4346c09 3931*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3932@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3933will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3934@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3935
3936There are two ways to include more than one section:
3937@smallexample
3938*(.text .rdata)
3939*(.text) *(.rdata)
3940@end smallexample
3941@noindent
3942The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3943@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3944first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3945they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3946@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3947@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3948
3949You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3950You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3951needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3952@smallexample
3953data.o(.data)
3954@end smallexample
3955
ae17ab41
CM
3956To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3957of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3958
3959Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3960
3961@smallexample
3962@group
3963SECTIONS @{
3964 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3965 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3966@}
3967@end group
3968@end smallexample
3969
3970In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3971input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3972@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3973@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3974whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3975
967928e9
AM
3976You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3977matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3978with no whitespace around the colon.
3979
3980@table @samp
3981@item archive:file
3982matches file within archive
3983@item archive:
3984matches the whole archive
3985@item :file
3986matches file but not one in an archive
3987@end table
3988
3989Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3990wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3991single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3992@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3993within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3994also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3995other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3996from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3997command.
3998
252b5132
RH
3999If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4000the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4001commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4002@smallexample
4003data.o
4004@end smallexample
4005
967928e9
AM
4006When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4007and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4008characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4009name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4010did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4011though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4012@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4013the archive search path.
4014
4015@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4016@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4017@cindex input section wildcards
4018@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4019@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4020@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4021In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4022name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4023
4024The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4025pattern for the file name.
4026
4027The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4028
4029@table @samp
4030@item *
4031matches any number of characters
4032@item ?
4033matches any single character
4034@item [@var{chars}]
4035matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4036character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4037@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4038@item \
4039quotes the following character
4040@end table
4041
4042When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4043will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4044Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4045exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4046@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4047a @samp{/} character.
4048
4049File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4050specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4051does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4052
4053If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4054appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4055will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4056sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4057@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4058@smallexample
4059.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4060.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4061@end smallexample
4062
bcaa7b3e 4063@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4064Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4065in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4066this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4067pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4068@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4069into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4070
bcaa7b3e
L
4071@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4072@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4073difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4074descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4075Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4076reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4077
02ecc8e9
L
4078@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4079@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4080difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4081ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4082encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4083
bcaa7b3e
L
4084@cindex SORT
4085@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4086
4087When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4088can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4089
4090@enumerate
4091@item
4092@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4093It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4094sections have the same name.
4095@item
4096@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4097It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4098sections have the same alignment.
4099@item
c0065db7 4100@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4101treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4102@item
4103@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4104is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4105@item
4106All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4107@end enumerate
4108
4109When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4110section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4111takes precedence over the command line option.
4112
4113If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4114command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4115treated as nested sorting command.
4116
4117@enumerate
4118@item
4119@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4120@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4121@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4122@item
4123@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4124@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4125@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4126@end enumerate
4127
4128If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4129command line option will be ignored.
4130
eda680f8
L
4131@cindex SORT_NONE
4132@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4133section sorting option.
4134
252b5132
RH
4135If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4136@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4137precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4138
4139This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4140files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4141sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4142The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4143with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4144linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4145@smallexample
4146@group
4147SECTIONS @{
4148 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4149 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4150 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4151 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4152@}
4153@end group
4154@end smallexample
4155
4156@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4157@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4158@cindex common symbol placement
4159@cindex uninitialized data placement
4160A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4161file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4162linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4163named @samp{COMMON}.
4164
4165You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4166other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4167particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4168input files are placed in another section.
4169
4170In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4171@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4172@smallexample
4173.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4174@end smallexample
4175
4176@cindex scommon section
4177@cindex small common symbols
4178Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4179example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4180symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4181different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4182the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4183symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4184to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4185locations.
4186
4187@cindex [COMMON]
4188You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4189notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4190@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4191
4192@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4193@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4194@cindex KEEP
4195@cindex garbage collection
4196When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4197it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4198This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4199with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4200@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4201
4202@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4203@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4204The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4205to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4206start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4207@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4208follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4209@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4210@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4211All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4212files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4213
4214@smallexample
4215@group
4216SECTIONS @{
4217 outputa 0x10000 :
4218 @{
4219 all.o
4220 foo.o (.input1)
4221 @}
36f63dca
NC
4222@end group
4223@group
252b5132
RH
4224 outputb :
4225 @{
4226 foo.o (.input2)
4227 foo1.o (.input1)
4228 @}
36f63dca
NC
4229@end group
4230@group
252b5132
RH
4231 outputc :
4232 @{
4233 *(.input1)
4234 *(.input2)
4235 @}
4236@}
4237@end group
a1ab1d2a 4238@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4239
4240@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4241@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4242@cindex data
4243@cindex section data
4244@cindex output section data
4245@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4246@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4247@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4248@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4249@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4250You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4251@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4252an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4253parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4254value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4255counter.
4256
4257The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4258store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4259bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4260stored.
4261
4262For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4263of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4264@smallexample
4265BYTE(1)
4266LONG(addr)
4267@end smallexample
4268
4269When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4270same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4271target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4272@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4273@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4274
4275If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4276which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4277When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4278true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4279endianness of the first input object file.
4280
36f63dca 4281Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4282between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4283@smallexample
4284SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4285@end smallexample
4286whereas this will work:
4287@smallexample
4288SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4289@end smallexample
4290
252b5132
RH
4291@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4292@cindex holes, filling
4293@cindex unspecified memory
4294You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4295current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4296otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4297gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4298with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4299necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4300point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4301than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4302different parts of an output section.
4303
4304This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4305value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4306@smallexample
563e308f 4307FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4308@end smallexample
4309
4310The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4311section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4312part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4313entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4314precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4315expression.
252b5132
RH
4316
4317@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4318@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4319There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4320commands.
4321
4322@table @code
4323@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4324@cindex input filename symbols
4325@cindex filename symbols
4326@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4327The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4328The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4329file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4330the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4331
4332This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4333normally used for any other object file format.
4334
4335@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4336@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4337@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4338@item CONSTRUCTORS
4339When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4340unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4341destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4342arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4343automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4344For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4345linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4346@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4347ignored for other object file formats.
4348
4349The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4350constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4351Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4352the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4353first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4354of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4355compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4356formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4357@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4358the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4359destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4360@code{exit}.
4361
4362For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4363arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4364addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4365and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4366linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4367runtime code expects to see.
4368
4369@smallexample
4370 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4371 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4372 *(.ctors)
4373 LONG(0)
4374 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4375 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4376 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4377 *(.dtors)
4378 LONG(0)
4379 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4380@end smallexample
4381
4382If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4383which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4384are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4385are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4386command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4387@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4388@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4389@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4390
4391Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4392and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4393need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4394scripts.
4395
4396@end table
4397
4398@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4399@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4400@cindex discarding sections
4401@cindex sections, discarding
4402@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4403The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4404for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4405be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4406@smallexample
49c13adb 4407.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4408@end smallexample
4409@noindent
4410will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4411@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4412sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4413space in an output section will also create the output section.
4414
a0976ea4 4415The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4416on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4417symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4418the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4419section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4420
4421@cindex /DISCARD/
4422The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4423input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4424section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4425
4426@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4427@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4428@cindex output section attributes
4429We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4430like this:
0c71d759 4431
252b5132 4432@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4433@group
7e7d5768 4434@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4435 [AT(@var{lma})]
4436 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4437 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4438 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4439 @{
4440 @var{output-section-command}
4441 @var{output-section-command}
4442 @dots{}
562d3460 4443 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4444@end group
4445@end smallexample
0c71d759 4446
252b5132
RH
4447We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4448@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4449remaining section attributes.
4450
a1ab1d2a 4451@menu
252b5132
RH
4452* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4453* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4454* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4455* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4456* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4457* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4458* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4459* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4460@end menu
4461
4462@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4463@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4464Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4465parentheses. The following types are defined:
4466
4467@table @code
4468@item NOLOAD
4469The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4470loaded into memory when the program is run.
4471@item DSECT
4472@itemx COPY
4473@itemx INFO
4474@itemx OVERLAY
4475These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4476rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4477marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4478section when the program is run.
4479@end table
4480
4481@kindex NOLOAD
4482@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4483@cindex loading, preventing
4484The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4485the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4486the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4487@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4488need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4489@smallexample
4490@group
4491SECTIONS @{
4492 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4493 @dots{}
4494@}
4495@end group
4496@end smallexample
4497
4498@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4499@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4500@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4501@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4502@cindex load address
4503@cindex section load address
4504Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4505@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4506@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4507specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4508address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4509
ea5cae92
NC
4510The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4511specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4512takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4513load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4514region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4515
4516If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4517section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4518load address:
4519
4520@itemize @bullet
4521@item
4522If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4523the LMA address as well.
4524
4525@item
4526If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4527
4528@item
4529Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4530with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4531section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4532VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4533the last section in the located region.
4534
4535@item
4536If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4537that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4538
4539@item
4540If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4541section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4542@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4543
4544@cindex ROM initialized data
4545@cindex initialized data in ROM
4546This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4547example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4548called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4549@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4550even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4551uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4552defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4553counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4554
4555@smallexample
4556@group
4557SECTIONS
4558 @{
4559 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4560 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4561 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4562 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4563 .bss 0x3000 :
4564 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4565@}
4566@end group
4567@end smallexample
4568
4569The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4570this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4571the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4572how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4573script.
4574
4575@smallexample
4576@group
4577extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4578char *src = &_etext;
4579char *dst = &_data;
4580
ea5cae92
NC
4581/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4582while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4583 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4584
ea5cae92 4585/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4586for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4587 *dst = 0;
4588@end group
4589@end smallexample
4590
bbf115d3
L
4591@node Forced Output Alignment
4592@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4593@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4594@cindex forcing output section alignment
4595@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e
NC
4596You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4597alternative you can force the output section alignment to the maximum alignment
4598of all its input sections with ALIGN_WITH_INPUT. The alignment forced by
4599ALIGN_WITH_INPUT is used even in case the load and virtual memory regions are
4600different.
bbf115d3 4601
7e7d5768
AM
4602@node Forced Input Alignment
4603@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4604@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4605@cindex forcing input section alignment
4606@cindex input section alignment
4607You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4608SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4609sections, whether larger or smaller.
4610
0c71d759
NC
4611@node Output Section Constraint
4612@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4613@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4614@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4615@cindex constraints on output sections
4616You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4617of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4618read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4619@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4620
252b5132 4621@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4622@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4623@kindex >@var{region}
4624@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4625@cindex memory regions and sections
4626You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4627using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4628
4629Here is a simple example:
4630@smallexample
4631@group
4632MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4633SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4634@end group
4635@end smallexample
4636
4637@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4638@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4639@kindex :@var{phdr}
4640@cindex section, assigning to program header
4641@cindex program headers and sections
4642You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4643using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4644one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4645assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4646@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4647linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4648
4649Here is a simple example:
4650@smallexample
4651@group
4652PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4653SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4654@end group
4655@end smallexample
4656
4657@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4658@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4659@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4660@cindex section fill pattern
4661@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4662You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4663@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4664(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4665within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4666alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4667necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4668of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4669an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4670fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4671other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4672pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4673expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4674
4675You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4676output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4677
4678Here is a simple example:
4679@smallexample
4680@group
563e308f 4681SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4682@end group
4683@end smallexample
4684
4685@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4686@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4687@kindex OVERLAY
4688@cindex overlays
4689An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4690are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4691the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4692copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4693required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4694can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4695than another.
4696
4697Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4698@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4699output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4700command is as follows:
4701@smallexample
4702@group
4703OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4704 @{
4705 @var{secname1}
4706 @{
4707 @var{output-section-command}
4708 @var{output-section-command}
4709 @dots{}
4710 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4711 @var{secname2}
4712 @{
4713 @var{output-section-command}
4714 @var{output-section-command}
4715 @dots{}
4716 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4717 @dots{}
4718 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4719@end group
4720@end smallexample
4721
4722Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4723section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4724section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4725those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4726except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4727sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4728
4729The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4730addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4731memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4732whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4733and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4734and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4735
56dd11f0
NC
4736If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4737references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4738the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4739sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4740@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4741
4742For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4743provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4744defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4745@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4746the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4747within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4748symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4749
4750At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4751the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4752
4753Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4754@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4755@smallexample
4756@group
4757 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4758 @{
4759 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4760 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4761 @}
4762@end group
4763@end smallexample
4764@noindent
4765This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4766address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4767@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4768following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4769@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4770@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4771
4772C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4773like the following.
4774
4775@smallexample
4776@group
4777 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4778 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4779 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4780@end group
4781@end smallexample
4782
4783Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4784everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4785example could have been written identically as follows.
4786
4787@smallexample
4788@group
4789 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4790 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4791 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4792 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4793 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4794 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4795 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4796@end group
4797@end smallexample
4798
4799@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4800@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4801@kindex MEMORY
4802@cindex memory regions
4803@cindex regions of memory
4804@cindex allocating memory
4805@cindex discontinuous memory
4806The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4807memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4808
4809The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4810memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4811may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4812can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4813set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4814regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4815around to fit into the available regions.
4816
4817A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4818command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4819you wish. The syntax is:
4820@smallexample
4821@group
a1ab1d2a 4822MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4823 @{
4824 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4825 @dots{}
4826 @}
4827@end group
4828@end smallexample
4829
4830The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4831region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4832Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4833with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4834must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4835add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4836command.
252b5132
RH
4837
4838@cindex memory region attributes
4839The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4840whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4841not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4842@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4843section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4844the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4845them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4846
4847The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4848@table @samp
4849@item R
4850Read-only section
4851@item W
4852Read/write section
4853@item X
4854Executable section
4855@item A
4856Allocatable section
4857@item I
4858Initialized section
4859@item L
4860Same as @samp{I}
4861@item !
c09e9a8c 4862Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4863@end table
4864
4865If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4866@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4867attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4868in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4869attributes.
4870
4871@kindex ORIGIN =
4872@kindex o =
4873@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4874The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4875the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4876cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4877abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4878@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4879
4880@kindex LENGTH =
4881@kindex len =
4882@kindex l =
4883The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4884region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4885be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4886@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4887
4888In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4889available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4890and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4891linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4892is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4893or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4894explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4895region.
4896
4897@smallexample
4898@group
a1ab1d2a 4899MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4900 @{
4901 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4902 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4903 @}
4904@end group
4905@end smallexample
4906
4907Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4908specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4909@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4910a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4911output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4912was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4913the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4914output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4915region, the linker will issue an error message.
4916
3ec57632 4917It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4918expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4919@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4920
4921@smallexample
4922@group
c0065db7 4923 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4924@end group
4925@end smallexample
4926
252b5132
RH
4927@node PHDRS
4928@section PHDRS Command
4929@kindex PHDRS
4930@cindex program headers
4931@cindex ELF program headers
4932@cindex program segments
4933@cindex segments, ELF
4934The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4935@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4936loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4937program with the @samp{-p} option.
4938
4939When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4940reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4941program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4942This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4943interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4944
4945The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4946in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4947precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4948the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4949not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4950
4951The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4952generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4953ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4954
4955This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4956@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4957
4958@smallexample
4959@group
4960PHDRS
4961@{
4962 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4963 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4964@}
4965@end group
4966@end smallexample
4967
4968The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4969of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4970header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4971with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4972must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4973is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4974
4975Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4976system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4977specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4978sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4979attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4980Section Phdr}.
4981
4982It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4983merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4984repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4985contain the section.
4986
4987If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4988then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4989not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4990convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4991placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4992default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4993segment at all.
4994
4995@kindex FILEHDR
4996@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4997You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4998the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4999The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5000file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5001include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5002segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5003these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5004
5005The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5006value of the keyword.
5007
5008@table @asis
5009@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5010Indicates an unused program header.
5011
5012@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5013Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5014the file.
5015
5016@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5017Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5018
5019@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5020Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5021found.
5022
5023@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5024Indicates a segment holding note information.
5025
5026@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5027A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5028ABI.
5029
5030@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5031Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5032
5033@item @var{expression}
5034An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5035be used for types not defined above.
5036@end table
5037
5038You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5039in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5040@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5041Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5042output section attribute.
5043
5044The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5045which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5046explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5047an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5048header.
5049
5050Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5051headers used on a native ELF system.
5052
5053@example
5054@group
5055PHDRS
5056@{
5057 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5058 interp PT_INTERP ;
5059 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5060 data PT_LOAD ;
5061 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5062@}
5063
5064SECTIONS
5065@{
5066 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5067 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5068 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5069 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5070 @dots{}
5071 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5072 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5073 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5074 @dots{}
5075@}
5076@end group
5077@end example
5078
5079@node VERSION
5080@section VERSION Command
5081@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5082@cindex symbol versions
5083@cindex version script
5084@cindex versions of symbols
5085The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5086only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5087symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5088a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5089shared library.
5090
5091You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5092you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5093also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5094
5095The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5096@smallexample
5097VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5098@end smallexample
5099
5100The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5101Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5102version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5103version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5104version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5105scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5106library.
5107
5108The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5109examples.
5110
5111@smallexample
5112VERS_1.1 @{
5113 global:
5114 foo1;
5115 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5116 old*;
5117 original*;
5118 new*;
252b5132
RH
5119@};
5120
5121VERS_1.2 @{
5122 foo2;
5123@} VERS_1.1;
5124
5125VERS_2.0 @{
5126 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5127 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5128 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5129 "f(int, double)";
5130 @};
252b5132
RH
5131@} VERS_1.2;
5132@end smallexample
5133
5134This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5135version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5136The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5137a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5138of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5139symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5140is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5141in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5142However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5143name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5144
5145Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5146depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5147to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5148
5149Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5150depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5151and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5152
5153When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5154specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5155unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5156unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5157somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5158wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5159wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5160set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5161ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5162
5163The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5164they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5165could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5166However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5167
0f6bf451 5168Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5169in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5170symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5171won't.
5172
5173@smallexample
7c9c73be 5174@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5175@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5176
252b5132
RH
5177When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5178symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5179requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5180shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5181loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5182linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5183application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5184way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5185all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5186search for each symbol reference.
5187
5188The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5189doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5190that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5191functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5192the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5193required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5194that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5195versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5196the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5197
5198There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5199first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5200source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5201script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5202maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5203@smallexample
5204__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5205@end smallexample
5206@noindent
5207in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5208be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5209The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5210@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5211takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5212
5213The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5214function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5215an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5216version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5217linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5218
5219To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5220source file. Here is an example:
5221
5222@smallexample
5223__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5224__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5225__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5226__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5227@end smallexample
5228
5229In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5230unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5231example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5232@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5233
5234When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5235some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5236this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5237@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5238declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5239you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5240
5241If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5242within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5243(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5244specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5245
cb840a31
L
5246You can also specify the language in the version script:
5247
5248@smallexample
5249VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5250@end smallexample
5251
c0065db7 5252The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5253The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5254demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5255patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5256@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5257
86043bbb
MM
5258Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5259described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5260or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5261the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5262whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5263cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5264might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5265should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5266expect when you upgrade.
5267
252b5132
RH
5268@node Expressions
5269@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5270@cindex expressions
5271@cindex arithmetic
5272The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5273that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5274expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5275host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5276
5277You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5278
5279The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5280expressions.
5281
5282@menu
5283* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5284* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5285* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5286* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5287* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5288* Operators:: Operators
5289* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5290* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5291* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5292@end menu
5293
5294@node Constants
5295@subsection Constants
5296@cindex integer notation
5297@cindex constants in linker scripts
5298All constants are integers.
5299
5300As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5301octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5302hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5303@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5304@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5305value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5306
5307@cindex scaled integers
5308@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5309@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5310@cindex suffixes for integers
5311@cindex integer suffixes
5312In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5313constant by
5314@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5315@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5316@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5317@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5318@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5319@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5320@tex
5321${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5322@end tex
5323@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5324respectively. For example, the following
5325all refer to the same quantity:
5326
252b5132 5327@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5328_fourk_1 = 4K;
5329_fourk_2 = 4096;
5330_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5331_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5332@end smallexample
5333
8a308ae8
NC
5334Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5335conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5336
0c71d759
NC
5337@node Symbolic Constants
5338@subsection Symbolic Constants
5339@cindex symbolic constants
5340@kindex CONSTANT
5341It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5342the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5343
5344@table @code
5345@item MAXPAGESIZE
5346@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5347The target's maximum page size.
5348
5349@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5350@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5351The target's default page size.
5352@end table
5353
5354So for example:
5355
5356@smallexample
9d5777a3 5357 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5358@end smallexample
5359
5360will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5361supported by the target.
5362
252b5132
RH
5363@node Symbols
5364@subsection Symbol Names
5365@cindex symbol names
5366@cindex names
5367@cindex quoted symbol names
5368@kindex "
5369Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5370and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5371Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5372specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5373keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5374@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5375"SECTION" = 9;
5376"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5377@end smallexample
5378
5379Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5380to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5381whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5382
ecca9871
L
5383@node Orphan Sections
5384@subsection Orphan Sections
5385@cindex orphan
5386Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5387are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5388script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5389output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5390placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5391attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5392same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5393If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5394at the end of the file.
5395
5396For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5397well as section flag.
5398
41911f68 5399If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5400the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5401__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5402section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5403orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5404representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5405character.
5406
252b5132
RH
5407@node Location Counter
5408@subsection The Location Counter
5409@kindex .
5410@cindex dot
5411@cindex location counter
5412@cindex current output location
5413The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5414current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5415location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5416within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5417anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5418
5419@cindex holes
5420Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5421moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5422location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5423and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5424doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5425
5426@smallexample
5427SECTIONS
5428@{
5429 output :
5430 @{
5431 file1(.text)
5432 . = . + 1000;
5433 file2(.text)
5434 . += 1000;
5435 file3(.text)
563e308f 5436 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5437@}
5438@end smallexample
5439@noindent
5440In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5441located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5442followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5443@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5444@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5445specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5446
5c6bbab8
NC
5447@cindex dot inside sections
5448Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5449current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5450statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5451absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5452however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5453not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5454
5455@smallexample
5456SECTIONS
5457@{
5458 . = 0x100
5459 .text: @{
5460 *(.text)
5461 . = 0x200
5462 @}
5463 . = 0x500
5464 .data: @{
5465 *(.data)
5466 . += 0x600
5467 @}
5468@}
5469@end smallexample
5470
5471The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5472and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5473the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5474much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5475move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5476and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5477the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5478the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5479
b5666f2f
AM
5480@cindex dot outside sections
5481Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5482output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5483needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5484
5485@smallexample
5486SECTIONS
5487@{
5488 start_of_text = . ;
5489 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5490 end_of_text = . ;
5491
5492 start_of_data = . ;
5493 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5494 end_of_data = . ;
5495@}
5496@end smallexample
5497
5498If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5499not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5500between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5501should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5502blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5503the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5504sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5505statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5506special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5507place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5508as follows:
5509
5510@smallexample
5511SECTIONS
5512@{
5513 start_of_text = . ;
5514 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5515 end_of_text = . ;
5516
5517 start_of_data = . ;
5518 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5519 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5520 end_of_data = . ;
5521@}
5522@end smallexample
5523
5524This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5525@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5526placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5527assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5528a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5529section. So you could write:
5530
5531@smallexample
5532SECTIONS
5533@{
5534 start_of_text = . ;
5535 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5536 end_of_text = . ;
5537
5538 . = . ;
5539 start_of_data = . ;
5540 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5541 end_of_data = . ;
5542@}
5543@end smallexample
5544
5545Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5546@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5547
252b5132
RH
5548@need 2000
5549@node Operators
5550@subsection Operators
5551@cindex operators for arithmetic
5552@cindex arithmetic operators
5553@cindex precedence in expressions
5554The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5555the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5556@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5557@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5558@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5559@smallexample
5560precedence associativity Operators Notes
5561(highest)
55621 left ! - ~ (1)
55632 left * / %
55643 left + -
55654 left >> <<
55665 left == != > < <= >=
55676 left &
55687 left |
55698 left &&
55709 left ||
557110 right ? :
557211 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5573(lowest)
5574@end smallexample
5575Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5576(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5577(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5578@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5579@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5580@tex
5581\vskip \baselineskip
5582%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5583\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5584\hrule
5585\halign
5586{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5587height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5588&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5589height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5590\noalign{\hrule}
5591height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5592&highest&&&&&\cr
5593% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5594&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5595&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5596&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5597&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5598&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5599&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5600&7&&left&&|&\cr
5601&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5602&9&&left&&||&\cr
5603&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5604&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5605&lowest&&&&&\cr
5606height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5607\hrule}
5608@end tex
5609@iftex
5610{
5611@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5612@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5613@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5614}
5615@end iftex
5616@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5617
5618@node Evaluation
5619@subsection Evaluation
5620@cindex lazy evaluation
5621@cindex expression evaluation order
5622The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5623an expression when absolutely necessary.
5624
5625The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5626address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5627regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5628as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5629
5630However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5631until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5632other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5633for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5634
5635The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5636assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5637allocation.
5638
5639Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5640@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5641
5642If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5643available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5644following
5645@smallexample
5646@group
5647SECTIONS
5648 @{
a1ab1d2a 5649 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5650 @{ *(.text) @}
5651 @}
5652@end group
5653@end smallexample
5654@noindent
5655will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5656address}.
5657
5658@node Expression Section
5659@subsection The Section of an Expression
5660@cindex expression sections
5661@cindex absolute expressions
5662@cindex relative expressions
5663@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5664@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5665@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5666Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5667relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5668using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5669value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5670symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5671operations.
5672
abf4be64
AM
5673Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5674section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5675address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5676@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5677functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5678One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5679(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5680differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5681versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5682section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5683Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5684absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5685given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5686everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5687
5688In the following simple example,
252b5132 5689
7542af2a
AM
5690@smallexample
5691@group
5692SECTIONS
5693 @{
5694 . = 0x100;
5695 __executable_start = 0x100;
5696 .data :
5697 @{
5698 . = 0x10;
5699 __data_start = 0x10;
5700 *(.data)
5701 @}
5702 @dots{}
5703 @}
5704@end group
5705@end smallexample
252b5132 5706
7542af2a
AM
5707both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5708address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5709@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5710section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5711
5c3049d2
AM
5712For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5713addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5714
5715@itemize @bullet
5716@item
c05f749e
AM
5717Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5718operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5719absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5720@item
7542af2a
AM
5721Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5722relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5723and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5724@item
c05f749e
AM
5725Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5726in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5727address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5728before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5729@end itemize
5730
5731The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5732
5733@itemize @bullet
5734@item
5735An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5736@item
5737The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5738@item
9bc8bb33 5739The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5740relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5741(after above conversions) is also a number.
5742@item
5743The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5744relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5745section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5746@item
5747The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5748conversions) is an absolute address.
5749@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5750
5751You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5752to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5753create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5754section @samp{.data}:
5755@smallexample
5756SECTIONS
5757 @{
5758 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5759 @}
5760@end smallexample
5761@noindent
5762If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5763@samp{.data} section.
5764
7542af2a
AM
5765Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5766particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5767
252b5132
RH
5768@node Builtin Functions
5769@subsection Builtin Functions
5770@cindex functions in expressions
5771The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5772use in linker script expressions.
5773
5774@table @code
5775@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5776@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5777@cindex expression, absolute
5778Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5779of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5780value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5781normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5782
5783@item ADDR(@var{section})
5784@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5785@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5786Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5787script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5788the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5789@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5790@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5791the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5792@smallexample
5793@group
5794SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5795 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5796 @{
252b5132
RH
5797 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5798 @dots{}
5799 @}
5800 .output :
5801 @{
5802 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5803 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5804 @}
5805@dots{} @}
5806@end group
5807@end smallexample
5808
876f4090
NS
5809@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5810@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5811@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5812@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5813@cindex round up location counter
5814@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5815@cindex round up expression
5816@cindex align expression
5817Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5818to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5819doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5820arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5821expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5822equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5823
5824Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5825next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5826variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5827input sections:
252b5132
RH
5828@smallexample
5829@group
5830SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5831 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5832 *(.data)
5833 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5834 @}
5835@dots{} @}
5836@end group
5837@end smallexample
5838@noindent
5839The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5840a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5841a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5842of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5843
5844The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5845
362c1d1a
NS
5846@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5847@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5848@cindex section alignment
5849Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5850been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5851evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5852the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5853value in that section.
5854@smallexample
5855@group
5856SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5857 .output @{
5858 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5859 @dots{}
5860 @}
5861@dots{} @}
5862@end group
5863@end smallexample
5864
252b5132
RH
5865@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5866@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5867This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5868scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5869section.
5870
2d20f7bf
JJ
5871@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5872@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5873This is equivalent to either
5874@smallexample
5875(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5876@end smallexample
5877or
5878@smallexample
5879(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5880@end smallexample
5881@noindent
5882depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5883for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5884@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5885If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5886memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5887bytes in the on-disk file.
5888
5889This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5890any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5891@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5892be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5893working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5894
5895@noindent
5896Example:
5897@smallexample
5898 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5899@end smallexample
5900
5901@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5902@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5903This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5904evaluation purposes.
5905
5906@smallexample
5907 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5908@end smallexample
5909
a4f5ad88
JJ
5910@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5911@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5912This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5913@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5914When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5915does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5916@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5917boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5918it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5919@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5920
5921@smallexample
5922 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5923@end smallexample
5924
252b5132
RH
5925@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5926@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5927@cindex symbol defaults
5928Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5929defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5930return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5931default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5932shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5933the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5934existed, its value is preserved:
5935
5936@smallexample
5937@group
5938SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5939 .text : @{
5940 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5941 @dots{}
5942 @}
5943 @dots{}
5944@}
5945@end group
5946@end smallexample
5947
3ec57632
NC
5948@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5949@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5950Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5951
252b5132
RH
5952@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5953@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5954@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5955Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5956Section LMA}).
5957
2e53f7d6
NC
5958@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
5959@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
5960Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
5961@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
5962
252b5132
RH
5963@kindex MAX
5964@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5965Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5966
5967@kindex MIN
5968@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5969Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5970
5971@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5972@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5973@cindex unallocated address, next
5974Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5975This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5976use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5977output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5978
3ec57632
NC
5979@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5980@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5981Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5982
ba916c8a
MM
5983@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5984@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5985Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
5986value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
5987@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
5988will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
5989can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5990``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5991name.
5992
252b5132
RH
5993@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5994@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5995@cindex section size
5996Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5997been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5998evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5999@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6000@smallexample
6001@group
6002SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6003 .output @{
6004 .start = . ;
6005 @dots{}
6006 .end = . ;
6007 @}
6008 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6009 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6010@dots{} @}
6011@end group
6012@end smallexample
6013
6014@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6015@itemx sizeof_headers
6016@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6017@cindex header size
6018Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6019information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6020this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6021choose, to facilitate paging.
6022
6023@cindex not enough room for program headers
6024@cindex program headers, not enough room
6025When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6026@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6027number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6028addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6029additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6030room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6031the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6032script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6033you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6034command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6035@end table
6036
6037@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6038@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6039@cindex implicit linker scripts
6040If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6041an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6042linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6043linker will report an error.
6044
6045An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6046
6047Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6048assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6049commands.
6050
6051Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6052at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6053read. This can affect archive searching.
6054
6055@ifset GENERIC
6056@node Machine Dependent
6057@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6058
6059@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6060@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6061sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6062functionality are not listed.
6063
6064@menu
36f63dca
NC
6065@ifset H8300
6066* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6067@end ifset
6068@ifset I960
6069* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6070@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6071@ifset M68HC11
6072* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6073@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6074@ifset ARM
6075* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6076@end ifset
6077@ifset HPPA
6078* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6079@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6080@ifset M68K
6081* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6082@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6083@ifset MIPS
6084* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6085@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6086@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6087* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6088@end ifset
2469cfa2 6089@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6090* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6091@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6092@ifset POWERPC
6093* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6094@end ifset
6095@ifset POWERPC64
6096* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6097@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6098@ifset SPU
6099* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6100@end ifset
74459f0e 6101@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6102* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6103@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6104@ifset WIN32
6105* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6106@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6107@ifset XTENSA
6108* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6109@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6110@end menu
6111@end ifset
6112
252b5132
RH
6113@ifset H8300
6114@ifclear GENERIC
6115@raisesections
6116@end ifclear
6117
6118@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6119@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6120
6121@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6122For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6123you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6124
6125@table @emph
6126@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6127@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6128@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6129targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6130program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6131respectively.
6132
6133@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6134@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6135@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6136@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6137sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6138page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6139(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6140@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6141top page of memory).
1502569c 6142
81f5558e
NC
6143@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6144indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6145displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6146the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6147@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6148whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6149range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6150
1502569c 6151@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6152@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6153biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6154which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6155page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6156(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6157@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6158the top page of memory).
6159
6160@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6161@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
616232 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6163changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6164(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6165@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6166the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6167@end table
6168
6169@ifclear GENERIC
6170@lowersections
6171@end ifclear
6172@end ifset
6173
36f63dca 6174@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6175@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6176@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6177@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6178@node Renesas
6179@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6180
c2dcd04e
NC
6181@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6182H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6183options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6184@end ifset
6185@end ifclear
6186
6187@ifset I960
6188@ifclear GENERIC
6189@raisesections
6190@end ifclear
6191
6192@node i960
6193@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6194
6195@cindex i960 support
6196
6197You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6198specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6199family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6200incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6201linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6202libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6203search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6204
6205For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6206well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6207paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6208the names
6209
6210@smallexample
6211@group
6212try
6213libtry.a
6214tryca
6215libtryca.a
6216@end group
6217@end smallexample
6218
6219@noindent
6220The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6221two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6222
6223You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6224the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6225use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6226specifies a library.
6227
6228@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6229@cindex relaxing on i960
6230@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6231you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6232@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6233them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6234instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6235instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6236target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6237not itself call any subroutines).
6238
48229727
JB
6239@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6240@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6241@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6242The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6243
6244The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6245
85fdf906
AH
6246@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6247@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6248The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6249
36f63dca
NC
6250@ifclear GENERIC
6251@lowersections
6252@end ifclear
6253@end ifset
6254
6255@ifset ARM
6256@ifclear GENERIC
6257@raisesections
6258@end ifclear
6259
93fd0973
SC
6260@ifset M68HC11
6261@ifclear GENERIC
6262@raisesections
6263@end ifclear
6264
6265@node M68HC11/68HC12
6266@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6267
6268@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6269
6270@subsection Linker Relaxation
6271
6272For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6273optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6274
6275@table @emph
6276@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6277@item relaxing address modes
6278@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6279targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6280program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6281respectively.
6282
6283@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6284transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6285page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6286
6287@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6288When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6289of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6290addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6291@code{bset} instructions.
6292
6293@end table
6294
6295@subsection Trampoline Generation
6296
6297@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6298@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6299For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6300call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6301will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6302trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6303case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6304point to the function trampoline.
6305
6306@ifclear GENERIC
6307@lowersections
6308@end ifclear
6309@end ifset
6310
36f63dca 6311@node ARM
3674e28a 6312@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6313
6314@cindex ARM interworking support
6315@kindex --support-old-code
6316For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6317between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6318been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6319line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6320libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6321option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6322given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6323which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6324the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6325non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6326
6327@cindex thumb entry point
6328@cindex entry point, thumb
6329@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6330The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6331@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6332But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6333branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6334executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6335
ce11ba6c
KT
6336@cindex PE import table prefixing
6337@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6338The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6339the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6340element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6341import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6342
e489d0ae
PB
6343@cindex BE8
6344@kindex --be8
6345The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6346executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6347The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6348
3674e28a
PB
6349@cindex TARGET1
6350@kindex --target1-rel
6351@kindex --target1-abs
6352The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6353@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6354or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6355and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6356
6357@cindex TARGET2
6358@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6359The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6360@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6361meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6362@table @samp
6363@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6364@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6365@item abs
6366@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6367@item got-rel
6368@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6369@end table
6370
319850b4
JB
6371@cindex FIX_V4BX
6372@kindex --fix-v4bx
6373The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6374specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6375interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6376also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6377
6378In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6379linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6380@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6381
6382In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6383relocations are ignored.
6384
845b51d6
PB
6385@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6386@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6387Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6388relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6389
6390@smallexample
6391TST rM, #1
6392MOVEQ PC, rM
6393BX Rn
6394@end smallexample
6395
6396This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6397and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6398condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6399
33bfe774
JB
6400@cindex USE_BLX
6401@kindex --use-blx
6402The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6403BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6404situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6405code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6406each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6407
6408This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6409specify it if you are using that target.
6410
c6dd86c6
JB
6411@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6412@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6413The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6414bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6415instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6416to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6417the support code can read the intended values.
6418
6419The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6420intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6421and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6422intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6423full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6424you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6425
6426If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6427enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6428@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6429mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6430vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6431@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6432
6433If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6434potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6435such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6436first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6437instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6438the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6439are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6440
2de70689
MGD
6441@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6442@kindex --fix-arm1176
6443@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6444The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6445in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6446are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6447unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6448
9d5777a3 6449Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6450Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6451http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6452
bf21ed78
MS
6453@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6454@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6455The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6456warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6457enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6458linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6459using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6460not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6461
6462@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6463@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6464The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6465warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6466@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6467linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6468using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6469
726150b7
NC
6470@cindex PIC_VENEER
6471@kindex --pic-veneer
6472The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6473ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6474is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6475@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6476
6477@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6478@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6479The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6480code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6481perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6482placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6483controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6484The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6485duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6486group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6487code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6488where they should be placed.
6489
6490The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6491@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6492placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6493branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6494placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6495value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6496exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6497A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6498linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6499from the input sections.
6500
6501The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6502@samp{N = +1}.
6503
1a51c1a4
NC
6504Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6505only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6506otherwise.
6507
36f63dca
NC
6508@ifclear GENERIC
6509@lowersections
6510@end ifclear
6511@end ifset
6512
6513@ifset HPPA
6514@ifclear GENERIC
6515@raisesections
6516@end ifclear
6517
6518@node HPPA ELF32
6519@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6520@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6521@kindex --multi-subspace
6522When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6523import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6524The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6525stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6526multiple sub-spaces.
6527
6528@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6529@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6530Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6531stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6532@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6533sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6534a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6535the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6536conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6537prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6538A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6539branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6540@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6541@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6542detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6543positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6544
6545Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6546single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6547create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6548large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6549
6550@ifclear GENERIC
6551@lowersections
6552@end ifclear
6553@end ifset
6554
7fb9f789
NC
6555@ifset M68K
6556@ifclear GENERIC
6557@raisesections
6558@end ifclear
6559
6560@node M68K
6561@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6562
6563@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6564@kindex --got=@var{type}
6565The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6566The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6567@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6568the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6569@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6570entries only at non-negative offsets.
6571@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6572entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6573support such GOTs.
6574@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6575output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6576file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6577files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6578
6579@ifclear GENERIC
6580@lowersections
6581@end ifclear
6582@end ifset
6583
833794fc
MR
6584@ifset MIPS
6585@ifclear GENERIC
6586@raisesections
6587@end ifclear
6588
6589@node MIPS
6590@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6591
6592@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6593@kindex --insn32
6594@kindex --no-insn32
6595The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6596microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6597in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6598used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6599or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6600including 16-bit ones where possible.
6601
6602@ifclear GENERIC
6603@lowersections
6604@end ifclear
6605@end ifset
6606
36f63dca
NC
6607@ifset MMIX
6608@ifclear GENERIC
6609@raisesections
6610@end ifclear
6611
6612@node MMIX
6613@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6614For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6615@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6616understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6617can translate between the two formats.
6618
6619There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6620Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6621registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6622equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6623@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6624global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6625this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6626symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6627
7a2de473
HPN
6628Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6629@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6630The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6631of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6632
6633Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6634are left out from an mmo file.
6635
6636@ifclear GENERIC
6637@lowersections
6638@end ifclear
6639@end ifset
6640
6641@ifset MSP430
6642@ifclear GENERIC
6643@raisesections
6644@end ifclear
6645
6646@node MSP430
6647@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6648For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6649will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6650just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6651
6652@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6653The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6654
6655@table @code
6656@item @samp{.vectors}
6657Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6658
6659@item @samp{.bootloader}
6660Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6661in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6662
6663@item @samp{.infomem}
6664Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6665this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6666
c0065db7 6667@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6668This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6669in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6670
6671@item @samp{.noinit}
6672Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6673
c0065db7 6674The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6675@end table
6676
6677@ifclear GENERIC
6678@lowersections
6679@end ifclear
6680@end ifset
6681
2a60a7a8
AM
6682@ifset POWERPC
6683@ifclear GENERIC
6684@raisesections
6685@end ifclear
6686
6687@node PowerPC ELF32
6688@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6689@cindex PowerPC long branches
6690@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6691Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6692displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6693@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6694@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6695the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6696section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6697section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6698@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6699both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6700considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6701
6702@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6703@table @option
6704@cindex PowerPC PLT
6705@kindex --bss-plt
6706@item --bss-plt
6707Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6708generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6709the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6710writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6711@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6712PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6713compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6714BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6715
016687f8
AM
6716@kindex --secure-plt
6717@item --secure-plt
6718@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6719@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6720when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6721layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6722style BSS PLT.
6723
2a60a7a8
AM
6724@cindex PowerPC GOT
6725@kindex --sdata-got
6726@item --sdata-got
6727The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6728sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6729@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6730section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6731@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6732@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6733@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6734@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6735PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6736pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6737GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6738really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6739
6740@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6741@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6742@item --emit-stub-syms
6743This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6744symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6745
6746@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6747@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6748@item --no-tls-optimize
6749PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6750sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6751disable the optimization.
6752@end table
6753
6754@ifclear GENERIC
6755@lowersections
6756@end ifclear
6757@end ifset
6758
6759@ifset POWERPC64
6760@ifclear GENERIC
6761@raisesections
6762@end ifclear
6763
6764@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6765@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6766
6767@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6768@table @option
6769@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6770@kindex --stub-group-size
6771@item --stub-group-size
6772Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6773by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6774@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6775sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6776a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6777the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6778conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6779prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6780A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6781branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6782@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6783@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6784detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6785positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6786
6787Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6788single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6789create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6790large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6791
6792@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6793@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6794@item --emit-stub-syms
6795This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6796symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6797
6798@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6799@kindex --dotsyms
6800@kindex --no-dotsyms
6801@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6802These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6803in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6804function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6805code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6806properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6807to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6808@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6809dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6810feature.
6811
6812@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6813@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6814@item --no-tls-optimize
6815PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6816sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6817disable the optimization.
6818
6819@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6820@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6821@item --no-opd-optimize
6822PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6823corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6824the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6825Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6826
6827@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6828@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6829@item --non-overlapping-opd
6830Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6831@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6832the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6833entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6834
6835@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6836@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6837@item --no-toc-optimize
6838PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6839entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6840reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6841marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6842marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6843relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6844unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6845reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6846discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6847reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6848code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6849optimization.
6850
6851@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6852@kindex --no-multi-toc
6853@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
6854If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6855@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6856where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
6857entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6858total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6859grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6860TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6861calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6862help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
686364K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6864Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
6865
6866@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6867@kindex --no-toc-sort
6868@item --no-toc-sort
6869By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6870happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6871placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6872with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6873referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6874@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6875results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6876off this feature.
6877
6878@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6879@kindex --plt-align
6880@kindex --no-plt-align
6881@item --plt-align
6882@itemx --no-plt-align
6883Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
6884aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
6885boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
6886are packed tightly.
6887
6888@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
6889@kindex --plt-static-chain
6890@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
6891@item --plt-static-chain
6892@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
6893Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
6894chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
6895chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
6896
6897@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
6898@kindex --plt-thread-safe
6899@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
6900@item --plt-thread-safe
6901@itemx --no-thread-safe
6902With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
6903lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
6904another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
6905order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
6906memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
6907barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
6908looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
6909seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
6910default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
6911@end table
6912
6913@ifclear GENERIC
6914@lowersections
6915@end ifclear
6916@end ifset
6917
49fa1e15
AM
6918@ifset SPU
6919@ifclear GENERIC
6920@raisesections
6921@end ifclear
6922
6923@node SPU ELF
6924@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6925
6926@cindex SPU ELF options
6927@table @option
6928
6929@cindex SPU plugins
6930@kindex --plugin
6931@item --plugin
6932This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6933
6934@cindex SPU overlays
6935@kindex --no-overlays
6936@item --no-overlays
6937Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6938regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6939@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6940turns off all this special overlay handling.
6941
6942@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6943@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6944@item --emit-stub-syms
6945This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6946symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6947
6948@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6949@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6950@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6951This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6952function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6953on calls to non-overlay regions.
6954
6955@cindex SPU local store size
6956@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6957@item --local-store=lo:hi
6958@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6959the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6960range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6961
c0065db7 6962@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6963@kindex --stack-analysis
6964@item --stack-analysis
6965SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6966unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6967under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6968@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6969@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6970determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6971for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6972for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6973for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6974find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6975and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6976under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6977dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6978is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6979and calls will be given.
6980
c0065db7 6981@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6982@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6983@item --emit-stack-syms
6984This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6985in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6986These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6987functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6988functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6989such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6990The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6991@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6992@end table
6993
6994@ifclear GENERIC
6995@lowersections
6996@end ifclear
6997@end ifset
6998
36f63dca
NC
6999@ifset TICOFF
7000@ifclear GENERIC
7001@raisesections
7002@end ifclear
7003
7004@node TI COFF
7005@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7006@cindex TI COFF versions
7007@kindex --format=@var{version}
7008The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7009TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7010also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7011format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7012header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7013
7014@ifclear GENERIC
7015@lowersections
7016@end ifclear
7017@end ifset
7018
2ca22b03
NC
7019@ifset WIN32
7020@ifclear GENERIC
7021@raisesections
7022@end ifclear
7023
7024@node WIN32
7025@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7026
c0065db7 7027This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7028See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7029command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7030
7031@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7032@cindex import libraries
7033@item import libraries
69da35b5 7034The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7035libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7036regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7037archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7038support for creating such libraries provided with the
7039@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7040
c0065db7
RM
7041@item exporting DLL symbols
7042@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7043The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7044
7045@table @emph
7046@item using auto-export functionality
7047@cindex using auto-export functionality
7048By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7049which is controlled by the following command line options:
7050
0a5d968e
NC
7051@itemize
7052@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7053@item --exclude-symbols
7054@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7055@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7056@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7057@end itemize
7058
09e2aba4
DK
7059When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7060(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7061symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7062often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7063private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7064options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7065exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7066final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7067
7068If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7069command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7070if either of the following are true:
7071
7072@itemize
7073@item A DEF file is used.
7074@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7075@end itemize
dc8465bf 7076
c0065db7
RM
7077@item using a DEF file
7078@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7079Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7080an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7081exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7082name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7083command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7084
7085@example
7086gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7087@end example
7088
0a5d968e
NC
7089Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7090@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7091
dc8465bf
NC
7092Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7093
7094@example
4b5bd4e7 7095LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7096
7097EXPORTS
7098foo
7099bar
7100_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7101another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7102var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7103doo = foo == foo2
7104eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7105@end example
dc8465bf 7106
7fcab871 7107This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7108symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7109alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7110by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7111@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7112@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7113export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7114in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7115symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7116
6b31ad16
DS
7117The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7118name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7119the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7120
b45619c0
NC
7121When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7122library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7123@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7124executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7125
7126With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7127specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7128non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7129
7130If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7131or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7132filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7133
4b5bd4e7
DS
7134The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7135
7136@example
7137EXPORTS
7138 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7139 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7140 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7141@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7142
7143Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7144@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7145@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7146@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7147Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7148@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7149string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7150
7151The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7152
7153@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7154will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7155by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7156linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7157library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7158
7159@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7160The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7161the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7162@code{*_imp__foo}).
7163
7164@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7165well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7166read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7167variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7168the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7169extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7170application will behave unexpectedly.
7171
7172@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7173it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7174symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7175API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7176the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7177
4b5bd4e7
DS
7178See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7179other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7180
7181@cindex creating a DEF file
7182While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7183with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7184
7185@item Using decorations
7186@cindex Using decorations
7187Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7188itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7189declared as:
7190
7191@example
7192__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7193__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7194@end example
7195
7196All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7197any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7198this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7199the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7200
7201Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7202decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7203instead:
7204
7205@example
7206__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7207__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7208@end example
7209
c0065db7
RM
7210This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7211when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7212variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7213code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7214of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7215omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7216@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7217information.
c0065db7 7218@end table
dc8465bf 7219
2ca22b03
NC
7220@cindex automatic data imports
7221@item automatic data imports
7222The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7223by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7224compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7225issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7226code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7227c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7228initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7229decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7230platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7231command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7232The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7233suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7234trigger the feature's use.
7235
c0065db7 7236auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7237additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7238
c0065db7 7239"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7240documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7241
c0065db7
RM
7242The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7243occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7244One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7245below.
7246
7247@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7248For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7249object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7250offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7251field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7252in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7253without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7254The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7255references.
7256
c0065db7
RM
7257The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7258be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7259themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7260runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7261compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7262support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7263run without error on an older system.
7264
c0065db7
RM
7265@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7266enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7267
7268@cindex direct linking to a dll
7269@item direct linking to a dll
7270The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7271including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7272libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7273traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7274libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7275function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7276though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7277storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7278tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7279large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7280
c0065db7 7281Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7282@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7283of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7284perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7285select the dll instead of an import library.
7286
2ca22b03 7287
69da35b5
NC
7288For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7289to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7290
7291@example
45e948fe
NC
7292libxxx.dll.a
7293xxx.dll.a
7294libxxx.a
7295xxx.lib
69da35b5 7296cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7297libxxx.dll
7298xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7299@end example
7300
69da35b5
NC
7301before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7302
c0065db7
RM
7303(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7304where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7305@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7306file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7307@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7308
c0065db7
RM
7309Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7310@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7311was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7312various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7313could coexist on the same machine.
7314
2ca22b03
NC
7315The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7316applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7317libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7318
7319@example
7320bin/
7321 cygxxx.dll
7322lib/
7323 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7324 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7325@end example
7326
c0065db7
RM
7327Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7328done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7329
73301. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7331@example
7332gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7333@end example
2ca22b03 7334
69da35b5
NC
7335However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7336(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7337@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7338not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7339
2ca22b03
NC
73402. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7341directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7342should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7343making the app/dll.
7344
7345@example
7346ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7347@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7348
7349Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7350
7351@example
7352gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7353@end example
69da35b5
NC
7354
7355This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7356perfectly legal
7357
7358@example
7359bin/
7360 cygxxx-5.dll
7361lib/
c0065db7 7362 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7363@end example
7364
dc8465bf 7365Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7366even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7367@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7368
7369Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7370wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7371
73721. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7373work with auto-imported data.
7374
dc8465bf
NC
73752. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7376import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7377symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7378for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7379possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7380
45e948fe
NC
73813. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7382critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7383in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7384stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7385
69da35b5 7386So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7387true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7388a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7389binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7390massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7391requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7392will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7393
c0065db7 7394@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7395@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7396@item adding additional names
7397Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7398A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7399exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7400when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7401import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7402
c0065db7 7403@example
dc8465bf
NC
7404LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7405
7406EXPORTS
c0065db7 7407foo
dc8465bf 7408_foo = foo
c0065db7 7409@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7410
7411The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7412
7413Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7414source code using the "weak" attribute:
7415
c0065db7
RM
7416@example
7417void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7418void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7419@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7420
7421See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7422symbols.
7423
7424@item renaming symbols
7425Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7426kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7427@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7428DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7429created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7430
c0065db7 7431@example
dc8465bf
NC
7432LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7433
7434EXPORTS
7435_foo = foo
c0065db7 7436@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7437
7438The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7439@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7440@end table
dc8465bf 7441
0a5d968e 7442Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7443unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7444If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7445@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7446that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7447@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7448renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7449to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7450the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7451In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7452which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7453
7454@cindex weak externals
7455@item weak externals
7456The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7457weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7458defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7459are three variants of weak externals:
7460@itemize
7461@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7462called lazy externals.
7463@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7464This form is not presently implemented.
7465@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7466implemented.
7467@end itemize
7468As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7469are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7470uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7471
7472@cindex aligned common symbols
7473@item aligned common symbols
7474As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7475desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7476the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7477carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7478by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7479tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7480but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7481warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7482@end table
7483
7484@ifclear GENERIC
7485@lowersections
7486@end ifclear
7487@end ifset
7488
e0001a05
NC
7489@ifset XTENSA
7490@ifclear GENERIC
7491@raisesections
7492@end ifclear
7493
7494@node Xtensa
7495@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7496
7497@cindex Xtensa processors
7498The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7499@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7500specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7501keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7502example, with the command:
7503
7504@smallexample
7505SECTIONS
7506@{
7507 .text : @{
7508 *(.literal .text)
7509 @}
7510@}
7511@end smallexample
7512
7513@noindent
7514@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7515and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7516literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7517interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7518group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7519files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7520and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7521
43cd72b9 7522@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7523@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7524Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7525provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7526is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7527literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7528will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7529location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7530the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7531unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7532@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7533range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7534
7535For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7536to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7537instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7538instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7539instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7540@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7541hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7542By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7543switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7544density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7545instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7546performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7547linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7548a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7549
7550The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7551control the linker:
7552
7553@cindex Xtensa options
7554@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7555@item --size-opt
7556When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7557more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7558no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7559alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7560preserve the correctness of the code.
7561@end table
e0001a05
NC
7562
7563@ifclear GENERIC
7564@lowersections
7565@end ifclear
7566@end ifset
7567
252b5132
RH
7568@ifclear SingleFormat
7569@node BFD
7570@chapter BFD
7571
7572@cindex back end
7573@cindex object file management
7574@cindex object formats available
7575@kindex objdump -i
7576The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7577These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7578object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7579format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7580it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7581associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7582object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7583(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7584list all the formats available for your configuration.
7585
7586@cindex BFD requirements
7587@cindex requirements for BFD
7588As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7589several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7590BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7591formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7592been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7593BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7594may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7595
7596One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7597mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7598useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7599conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7600
7601@menu
7602* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7603@end menu
7604
7605@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7606@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7607@cindex opening object files
7608@include bfdsumm.texi
7609@end ifclear
7610
7611@node Reporting Bugs
7612@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7613@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7614@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7615
ff5dcc92 7616Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7617
7618Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7619it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7620to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7621work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7622@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7623
7624In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7625information that enables us to fix the bug.
7626
7627@menu
7628* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7629* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7630@end menu
7631
7632@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7633@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7634@cindex bug criteria
7635
7636If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7637
7638@itemize @bullet
7639@cindex fatal signal
7640@cindex linker crash
7641@cindex crash of linker
7642@item
7643If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7644@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7645
7646@cindex error on valid input
7647@item
ff5dcc92 7648If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7649
7650@cindex invalid input
7651@item
ff5dcc92 7652If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7653may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7654object files are correct.
7655
7656@item
7657If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7658improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7659@end itemize
7660
7661@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7662@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7663@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7664@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7665
7666A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7667products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7668recommend you contact that organization first.
7669
7670You can find contact information for many support companies and
7671individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7672distribution.
7673
ad22bfe8 7674@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7675Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7676@value{BUGURL}.
7677@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7678
7679The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7680@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7681fact or leave it out, state it!
7682
7683Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7684problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7685assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7686matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7687the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7688location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7689were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7690into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7691specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7692and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7693
7694Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7695the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7696on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7697
7698Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7699bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7700respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7701You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7702
7703To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7704
7705@itemize @bullet
7706@item
ff5dcc92 7707The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7708the @samp{--version} argument.
7709
7710Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7711the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7712
7713@item
ff5dcc92 7714Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7715patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7716
7717@item
7718The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7719version number.
7720
7721@item
ff5dcc92 7722What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7723``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7724
7725@item
7726The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7727observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7728list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7729sufficient.
7730
7731If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7732and then we might not encounter the bug.
7733
7734@item
7735A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7736bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7737provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7738bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7739state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7740requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7741we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7742attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7743
7744If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7745@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7746object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7747@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7748how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7749
7750@item
7751A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7752incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7753
ff5dcc92 7754Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7755will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7756not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7757a chance to make a mistake.
7758
7759Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7760say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7761copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7762C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7763and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7764fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7765you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7766any conclusion from our observations.
7767
7768@item
ff5dcc92 7769If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7770diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7771@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7772If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7773context, not by line number.
7774
7775The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7776sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7777@end itemize
7778
7779Here are some things that are not necessary:
7780
7781@itemize @bullet
7782@item
7783A description of the envelope of the bug.
7784
7785Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7786which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7787changes will not affect it.
7788
7789This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7790will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7791with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7792We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7793
7794Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7795of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7796output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7797less time, and so on.
7798
7799However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7800report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7801
7802@item
7803A patch for the bug.
7804
7805A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7806the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7807a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7808to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7809
ff5dcc92 7810Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7811construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7812through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7813able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7814fixed.
7815
7816And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7817patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7818help us to understand.
7819
7820@item
7821A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7822
7823Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7824things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7825@end itemize
7826
7827@node MRI
7828@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7829@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7830To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7831linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7832alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7833described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7834simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7835@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7836linker commands; these commands are described here.
7837
7838In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7839file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7840features to make use of them.
7841
7842You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7843@samp{-c} command-line option.
7844
7845Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7846command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7847blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7848MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7849issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7850
7851Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7852
7853You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7854lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7855The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7856
7857@table @code
7858@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7859@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7860@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7861Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7862the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7863@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7864your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7865script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7866commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7867input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7868@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7869
7870@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7871@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7872Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7873in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7874
7875@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7876
7877@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7878@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7879Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7880@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7881
7882@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7883@item BASE @var{expression}
7884Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7885absolute addresses) in the output file.
7886
7887@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7888@item CHIP @var{expression}
7889@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7890This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7891
7892@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7893@item END
7894This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7895
7896@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7897@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7898Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7899language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7900
7901@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7902@item
252b5132
RH
7903S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7904
7905@item
7906IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7907
7908@item
7909COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7910@samp{COFF}
7911@end enumerate
7912
7913@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7914@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7915Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7916@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7917
7918The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7919same line, with no change in its effect.
7920
7921@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7922@item LOAD @var{filename}
7923@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7924Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7925same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7926command line.
7927
7928@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7929@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7930@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7931MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7932option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7933
7934@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7935@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7936@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7937Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7938order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7939script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7940sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7941file, in the order specified.
7942
7943@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7944@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7945@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7946@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7947Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7948@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7949
7950@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7951@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7952@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7953@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7954You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7955specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7956If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7957@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7958@end table
7959
793c5807
NC
7960@node GNU Free Documentation License
7961@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7962@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7963
370b66a1
CD
7964@node LD Index
7965@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7966
7967@printindex cp
7968
7969@tex
7ca01ed9 7970% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
7971% meantime:
7972\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7973\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7974\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7975\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7976\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7977\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7978\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7979\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7980\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 7981% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
7982@end tex
7983
252b5132 7984@bye
This page took 1.089403 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.